2005 Infiniti Q45 Owner Guide

Copy and paste this link to your website, so they can see this document directly without any plugins.



Keywords

vehicle, system, will, your, with, seat, control, when, switch, light, When, tire, that, 04.4.16/F50-D, engine, INFINITI, belt, from, restraint, button, should, this, child, indicator, front, This, brake, ignition, driving, warning

Transcript

Foreword
Your INFINITI represents a new way of
thinking about vehicle design. It integrates advanced engineering and superior craftsmanship with a simple, refined
aesthetic sensitivity associated with traditional Japanese culture.
The result is a different notion of luxury
and beauty. The car itself is important,
but also is the sense of harmony that the
vehicle evokes in its driver, and the
sense of satisfaction you feel with the
INFINITI — from the way it looks and
drives to the high level of dealer service.
To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to
the fullest, we encourage you to read this
Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains
all of the features, controls and performance characteristics of your INFINITI; it
also provides important instructions and
safety information.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
is included in your Owner’s literature
portfolio. Always carry it with you when
you take your vehicle to an INFINITI
dealer. The Warranty Information
Booklet contents provide complete information about all warranties covering this
vehicle, the requirements to keep the
warranties in effect as well as the
INFINITI Roadside Assistance program.
Additionally, a separate Customer Care
and Lemon Law Information Booklet will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s
lemon law.
INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satisfying ownership experience for as long
as you own your car. Should you have
any questions regarding your INFINITI or
your INFINITI dealer, please contact our
Consumer Affairs department at:
In U.S. 1-800-662-6200.
In Canada 1-800-361-4792.
READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY
Before driving your vehicle, read your
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the
safe operation of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to help
ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you
and your passengers!
O NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
O ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
O ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Pre-teen
children should be seated in the rear
seat.
O ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
O ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for
important safety information.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may
even violate governmental regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from modification will
not be covered under the INFINITI warranties.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all
options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
does not apply to your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at
the time of printing. INFINITI reserves the
right to change specifications or design at
any time without notice.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this
manual. They are used in the following
ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the
procedures must be followed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moderate
personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To
avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must
be followed carefully.
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen”.
If you see a symbol similar to these in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to
the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these call attention to an item in the illustration.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
© 2005 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
TOKYO, JAPAN
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by
any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co.,
Ltd.
SIC0697
Z 05.2.25/F50-D X
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents 0
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8
Technical and consumer information 9
Index 10
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
0 Illustrated table of contents
Exterior front .................................................... 0-2
Exterior rear ..................................................... 0-3
Instrument panel ............................................. 0-4
Meters and gauges........................................... 0-5
Engine compartment check locations................ 0-6
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. Hood (Page 3-9)
2. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P.2-22)/Bulb replacement (P.8-27)
3. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P.2-20)/Wiper replacement (P.8-20)
4. Interior light (P.2-43)
5. Sunroof (P.2-40)
6. Power windows (P.2-38)
7. Tires
— Wheel and tires (P.8-31, P.9-9)
— Flat tire (P.6-2)
8. Mirrors (P.3-18)
9. Doors
— Keys (P.3-2)
— Door locks (P.3-4)
— Electronic key (P.3-6)
SSI0054
EXTERIOR FRONT
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. High-mounted stop light (P.8-28)
2. Side marker, Stop/Tail, Turn signal
light (Bulb replacement) (P.8-28)
3. Rear window defroster switch (P.2-22)
4. Fuel filler lid (P.3-15)/Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)
5. Trunk lid (P.3-10)
6. Child safety locks (P.3-6)
SSI0055
EXTERIOR REAR
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. Side ventilator (P.4-12)
2. Outside mirror remote control (P.3-19)
3. Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch
(P.2-22)
4. Steering wheel switch for audio control (P.4-33)
5. Meters and gauges (P.2-3)
6. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-33)
7. Cruise control main/set switch
(P.5-14)
Intelligent cruise control switch
(P.5-16)
8. Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P.2-20)
9. Ignition switch (P.5-6)
10.Security indicator light (P.2-17)
11.Center ventilator (P.4-12)
12.Hazard warning flasher switch
(P.2-27)
13.Display, Climate and Audio control
switches/buttons (P.4-2)/Navigation
system*
14.Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P.1-33)
15.Instrument brightness control (P.2-26)
16.Vehicle dynamic control OFF switch
(P.2-32)
17.Hood release handle (P.3-9)SIC2403
INSTRUMENT PANEL
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
18.Active damper suspension mode
selector (P.2-31)
19.Tilting/telescopic steering wheel
switch (P.3-16)
20.Fuse box cover (P.8-23)
21.Parking brake pedal/parking brake
release pedal (P.5-14)
22.CD changer (P.4-31)
23.Cigarette lighter and ashtray (P.2-33)
24.Clock (P.2-32)
25.Cassette deck (P.4-29)
26.Glove box (P.2-36)
27.Canceling the power to the trunk
switch (P.3-11)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation
System Owner’s Manual.
1. Engine coolant temperature gauge
(P.2-5)
2. Warming/indicator lights (P.2-10)
3. Fuel gauge (P.2-6)
4. Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-4)
5. Speedometer (P.2-4)
6. Cruise control system/Intelligent
cruise control system display (P.2-14)
7. Tachometer (P.2-5)
SIC2404
METERS AND GAUGES
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-23)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-11)
3. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-14)
4. Coolant reservoir (P.8-9)
5. Battery (P.8-16)
6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
(P.8-15)
7. Radiator filler cap (P.8-10)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-11)
9. Air cleaner (P.8-19)
SDI1642
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system
Seats................................................................ 1-2
Front power seat adjustment....................... 1-2
Rear power seat adjustment (if so
equipped) ................................................... 1-4
Head restraint ............................................. 1-5
Active head restraint (front seats) ............... 1-6
Seat belts......................................................... 1-6
Precautions on seat belt usage ................... 1-6
Child safety................................................. 1-9
Pregnant women ....................................... 1-10
Injured persons ........................................ 1-10
Pre-crash seat belts (front seats) .............. 1-10
Three-point type seat belt ......................... 1-11
Seat belt extenders................................... 1-14
Seat belt maintenance .............................. 1-14
Child restraints............................................... 1-15
Precautions on child restraints.................. 1-15
Child restraint installation on rear seat center
or outboard positions ............................... 1-17
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
SYSTEM..................................................... 1-22
Top tether strap child restraint ................. 1-24
Child restraint installation on front passenger
seat .......................................................... 1-25
Booster seats ................................................. 1-28
Precautions on booster seats.................... 1-28
Booster seat installation on rear seat center or
outboard positions.................................... 1-31
Booster seat installation on front passenger
seat .......................................................... 1-32
Supplemental restraint system ....................... 1-33
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system ...................................................... 1-33
Supplemental air bag warning labels ........ 1-44
Supplemental air bag warning light .......... 1-44
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
WARNING
O Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
O For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well back
in the seat and adjust the seat belt
properly. See “Precautions on seat belt
usage” later in this section.
FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
O Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation. The seat may
move suddenly and could cause loss of
control of the vehicle.
O Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
Operating tips
O The seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch.
O Do not operate the power seat for a
long period of time when the engine is
off. This will discharge the battery.
SSS0133B
SEATS
1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Forward and backward
Moving the switch j1 forward or backward
will slide the seat forward or backward to
the desired position.
Reclining
Move the recline switch j2 backward until
the desired angle is obtained. To bring the
seatback forward again, move the switch
forward.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions on
seat belt usage” later in this section.) The
seatback may also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is parked.
Seat lifter
Push the front or rear end of the switch up
or down to adjust the angle and height of
the seat.
SPA1273C SPA1275A
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
The lumbar support feature provides
lower back support to the driver. Move
the lower part of the switch forward or
backward to adjust the seat lumbar area.
REAR POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
(if so equipped)
Forward and backward
Push the switch to move the seat forward
j1 or backward j2 . The seats move continuously while the switch is being
pushed.
Entry/exit assist (automatic
return) (if so equipped)
Pushing the ON side j1 of the switch located on the rear armrest, the automatic
return function will activate.
When a rear door is opened, the rear seat
of the corresponding side automatically
slides all the way back, facilitating ease
of entry and exit.
Pushing the CANCEL side j2 of the switch
will deactivate the automatic return function.
SPA1276 SSS0324 SPA1586C
1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Automatic reverse operation (for
automatic drive positioner system)
When the driver’s seat is moved backward
by the automatic drive positioner system,
the rear left side seat will automatically
move backward when it is reclined, even
if the rear seat automatic return switch is
in the CANCEL position.
This operation maintains rear passenger
foot and knee space.
HEAD RESTRAINT
WARNING
Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Do not
remove them. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
To lower, push the lock knob j1 and push
the head restraint down.
To adjust the head restraint angle j2 ,
push it in the direction required (except
rear center seat head restraint).
Adjust the head restraints as illustrated
so the center is level with the center of
your ears.
SSS0228A SSS0287
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front
seats)
WARNING
O Always adjust the head restraints properly as specified in the previous section. Failure to do so can reduce the effectiveness of the active head restraint.
O Active head restraints are designed to
supplement other safety systems. Always wear seat belts. No system can
prevent all injuries in any accident.
O Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks. Doing so could impair active head restraint function.
The active head restraint moves forward
utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end
collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant’s head
by reducing its backward movement and
helping absorb some of the forces that
may lead to whiplash type injuries.
Active head restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which
it is said that whiplash injury occurs
most.
Active head restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their
original positions.
Properly adjust the active head restraints
as described in the previous section.
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted, and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat, your chances of
being injured or killed in an accident
and/or the severity of injury may be
greatly reduced. INFINITI strongly encourages you and all of your passengers
to buckle up every time you drive, even if
your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.
SPA1278
SEAT BELTS
1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
WARNING
O Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.
O The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so
may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident. Serious injury or death can
occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.
O Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck.
The belt should be away from your face
and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
O Position the lap belt as low and snug
as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT
THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high
could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.
O Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
O Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.
O Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
O Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
O If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
turned ON with all doors closed and all
seat belts fastened, it may indicate a
malfunction in the system. Have the
system checked by an INFINITI dealer.
O Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has
activated, it cannot be reused and must
be replaced together with the retractor.
See your INFINITI dealer.
SSS0136A
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O Removal and installation of the pretensioner seat belt system components
should be done by an INFINITI dealer.
O All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision
by an INFINITI dealer. INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies
in use during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and the
belts show no damage and continue to
operate properly.
Seat belt assemblies not in use during
a collision should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
O All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations. The
child restraints should be replaced if
they are damaged.
SSS0134A SSS0016
SSS0014
1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
CHILD SAFETY
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in
this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government
traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be
sure to learn the best way to transport your
child.
There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
O Rear facing child restraint
O Front facing child restraint
O Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child’s
size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year
and less than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be
placed in rear facing child restraints. Front
facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster
seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a front facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection.
The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them
properly. The shoulder belt may come too
close to the face or neck. The lap belt may
not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could
cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved
child restraints for infants and small children. (See “Child restraints” later in this
section.)
Also, there are other types of child restraints available for larger children for additional protection.
INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. This is especially important because your vehicle
has a supplemental restraint system (air
bag system) for the front passenger. See
“Supplemental restraint system” earlier in
this section.
Infants
Infants up to at least one year old should
be placed in a rear facing child restraint.
INFINITI recommends that infants be
placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
You should choose a child restraint which
fits your vehicle and always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
Small children
Children that are over one year old and
weight between 20 lbs (9 kg) and 40 lbs
(18 kg) can be placed in a forward facing
child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for minimum and maximum
weight and height recommendations. INFINITI recommends that small children be
placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
You should choose a child restraint that fits
your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
Larger children
Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained
by the seat belts which are provided. The
seat belt may not fit properly if the child
is less than 4 feet 9 inches (142.5 cm) tall
and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and
80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be
used to obtain proper seat belt fit.
INFINITI recommends that a child be
placed in a commercially available
booster seat if the shoulder belt in the
child’s seating position fits close to the
face or neck or if the lap portion of the
seat belt goes across the abdomen. The
booster seat should raise the child so
that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle portion of
the shoulder and the lap belt is low on
the hips. A booster seat can only be used
in seating positions that have a threepoint type seat belt. The booster seat
should fit the vehicle seat and have a
label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Once the child has grown so the shoulder
belt is no longer on or near the face and
neck, use the shoulder belt without the
booster seat.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat
and do not allow a child in the cargo areas
while the vehicle is moving. The child could
be seriously injured or killed in an accident
or sudden stop.
PREGNANT WOMEN
INFINITI recommends that pregnant
women use seat belts. The seat belt
should be worn snug, and always position
the lap belt as low as possible around the
hips, not the waist, and place the
shoulder belt over your shoulder and
across your chest. Never run the
lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal
area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
INFINITI recommends that injured persons use seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
PRE-CRASH SEAT BELTS (front
seats)
The pre-crash seat belt tightens the seat
belt to help restrain front seat occupants
under emergency braking. This can help
reduce the risk of injury when a collision
occurs.
Pre-crash seat belts will not activate
when:
O the brake pedal is not depressed
O the seat belt is not fastened
O the shift lever is in the reverse position
O the vehicle speed is under 10 mph (15
km/h)
Always wear your seat belt correctly and
sit upright and well back.
If the seat belt warning light blinks even
if the seat belt is fastened, it may indicate
the pre-crash seat belt system has a malfunction. Have your INFINITI dealer check
and repair the system.
1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WARNING
O Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
O Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the
seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. In an accident, you
could be thrown into it and receive neck
or other serious injuries. You could also
slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
O For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat and adjust the seat belt properly.
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in
this section.
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the
buckle until it clicks.
O The retractor is designed to lock during
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow
pulling motion will permit the belt to
move, and allow you some freedom of
movement in the seat.
O If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then smoothly
pull the belt out of the retractor.
SSS0292
Front seat
SSS0293
Rear seat
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Z 04.11.30/F50-D X
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
snug on the hips as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
the retractor to take up extra slack.
Make sure the shoulder belt is routed
over your shoulder and across your
chest.
The front passenger and rear seat belts
have a locking mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the
automatic locking mode or child restraint
mode.
When the automatic locking mechanism is
activated the seat belt cannot be extended
again until the seat belt tongue is detached
from the buckle and fully retracted. Once
retracted, the seat belt is in the emergency
locking mode. For additional information,
see “Child restraints” later in this section.
The automatic locking mode should be
used only for child restraint installation.
During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the locking mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that seatbacks are completely secured in the
latched position. If they are not completely
secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
SSS0290
Front seat
SSS0291A
Rear seat
1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.11.30/F50-D X
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the belt, push the button on
the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.
Checking seat belt operation
Your seat belt retractors are designed to
lock belt movement by two separate
methods:
O when the belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor.
O when the vehicle slows down rapidly.
To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:
O grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock
and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check or if you have any question about
belt operation, see your INFINITI dealer.
Center of rear seat
Selecting correct set of seat belts:
The center seat belt buckle is identified
by the CENTER mark jA . The center seat
belt tongue can be fastened only into the
center seat belt buckle.
SSS0326 SPA1836
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
See earlier in “Seat belts” for precautions
on seat belt usage.
WARNING
O After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.
O The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for
you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint
system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.
To adjust, push the button jA , and then
move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, so that the belt passes
over the center of the shoulder. The belt
should be away from your face and neck,
but not falling off of your shoulder. Release the button to lock the shoulder belt
anchor into position.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the
lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and
may be used for either the driver or front
passenger seating position. See your
INFINITI dealer for assistance if the extender is required.
WARNING
O Only INFINITI belt extenders, made by
the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with the INFINITI seat belts.
O Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
O Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
O To clean the seat belt webbings, apply
a mild soap solution or any non-caustic
solution recommended for gently
cleaning cloth upholstery or carpets.
SSS0299A
1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Then brush it, wipe with a cloth and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow
the seat belts to retract until they are
completely dry.
O If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the
seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry
cloth.
O Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components such
as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work properly.
If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or
other damage on the webbing are
found, the entire belt assembly should
be replaced.
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
O Infants and small children should always be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while riding in the vehicle.
Failure to use a child restraint can result in serious injury or death.
O Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The
child could be crushed between the
adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do
not put the same seat belt around both
your child and yourself.
O Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating
supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rearfacing child restraint must only be used
in the rear seat.
O INFINITI recommends that the child restraint be installed in the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front seat.
O An improperly installed child restraint
could lead to serious injury or death in
an accident.
In general, child restraints are designed
to be installed with the lap portion of a
lap/shoulder seat belt. In addition, this
vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint lower anchor system, referred to
as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include two rigid or webbingmounted attachments that can be connected to these lower anchors. For details, see “LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren) SYSTEM” later in this
section.
Child restraints for infants and children of
various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any child restraint system, keep the following points in
mind:
O Choose only a restraint with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
O Check the child restraint in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.
O If the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the
child restraint and check the various
adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child.
Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child’s height and
weight. Always follow all recommended
procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in approved child
restraints at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
WARNING
O Improper use of a child restraint can increase the risk or severity of injury for
both the child and other occupants of the
vehicle.
O Follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use. When purchasing a child restraint,
be sure to select one which will fit your
child and vehicle. It may not be possible
to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle.
O If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being injured
in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.
O Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible.
O After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. The child restraint
should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm). If the restraint is not secure,
tighten the belt as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints
fit in all types of vehicles.
O If you must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat, see “Child restraint installation on front passenger
seat” later in this section for details.
O When your child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in case
of a sudden stop or accident.
CAUTION
Remember that a child restraint left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot. Check
the seating surface and buckles before
placing your child in the child restraint.
1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
ON REAR SEAT CENTER OR
OUTBOARD POSITIONS
Front facing
WARNING
O The three-point belt in your vehicle is
equipped with an automatic locking
mode retractor which must be used when
installing a child restraint.
O Failure to use the retractor’s locking
mode will result in the child restraint not
being properly secured. The restraint
could tip over or otherwise be unsecured
and cause injury to the child in a sudden
stop or collision.
When you install a front facing child restraint in a rear outboard or center seat,
follow these steps:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2. The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove
the head restraint to obtain the correct
child restraint fit. See “Head restraint
adjustment” earlier in this section. If
the head restraint is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to install the
head restraint when the child restraint
is removed. If the seating position does
not have an adjustable head restraint
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
SSS0278
Rear outboard seat
SSS0252A
Rear center seat
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
Z 04.11.23/F50-D X
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
4. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the
belt is fully extended. At this time, the
belt retractor is in the automatic locking
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts
back to emergency locking mode when
the belt is fully retracted.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in
the belt.
SSS0253D SSS0254D SSS0332
1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.29/F50-D X
6. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely
held in place. It should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does move
more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again on
the shoulder belt to further tighten the
child restraint. If unable to properly secure the restraint, move the restraint to
another rear seating position and try
again, or try a different child restraint.
Not all child restraints fit in all types of
vehicles.
7. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull
more seat belt out of the retractor. If
you cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode.
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic
locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.
Rear facing
WARNING
O The three-point belt in your vehicle is
equipped with an automatic locking
mode retractor which must be used when
installing a child restraint.
O Failure to use the retractor’s locking
mode will result in the child restraint not
being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a
sudden stop or collision.
When you install a rear facing child restraint in the rear seat, follow these steps:
SSS0333
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
Z 04.11.29/F50-D X
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
SSS0334
Rear outboard seat
SSS0279A
Rear center seat
SSS0335
1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.29/F50-D X
3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the
belt is fully extended. At this time, the
seat belt retractor is in the automatic
locking mode (child restraint mode). It
reverts back to emergency locking
mode when the belt is fully retracted.
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in
the belt.
5. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely
held in place. It should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does move
more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again on
the shoulder belt to further tighten the
child restraint. If unable to properly secure the restraint, move the restraint to
another rear seating position and try
again, or try a different child restraint.
Not all child restraints fit in all types of
vehicles.
SSS0258A SSS0259A SSS0260A
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
Z 04.4.29/F50-D X
6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull
more belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot pull any more belt webbing out
of the retractor, the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic
locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM
1. LATCH Lower anchor points (right)
2. LATCH Lower anchor points (left)
3. LATCH Label
(1 and 2 are located in the space between
the seatback and seat cushion)
WARNING
O Attach LATCH system compatible child
restraints only at the locations shown. If
a child restraint is not secured properly,
your child could be seriously injured or
killed in an accident.
O Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH
system anchors. The child restraint will
not be secured properly.
O The LATCH system anchors are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints. Under
no circumstance are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses.
Some child restraints include two rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be
connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. This
system is known as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system.
This system may also be referred to as the
ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.
SSS0327
1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.11.29/F50-D X
With this system, you do not have to use a
vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH
system compatible child restraints. Check
your child restraint for a label stating that it
is compatible with the LATCH system. This
information may also be in the child restraint owner’s manual. If you have such a
child restraint, refer to the illustration for
the seating positions equipped with LATCH
system anchors which can be used to secure the child restraint.
The LATCH system anchors are located at
the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seatback to
help you locate the LATCH system anchors.
Some child restraints may also require the
use of a top tether strap. See “Top tether
strap child restraint” later in this section
for installation instructions.
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child
restraint.
When you install a LATCH system compatible child restraint to the lower anchor attachments, follow these steps.
WARNING
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your
fingers into the lower anchor area and
feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the LATCH system anchors, such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured
properly if the LATCH system anchors are obstructed.
1. To install the LATCH system compatible
child restraint, insert the child restraint
LATCH system anchor attachments into
the anchor points on the rear seat. If
the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether, see “Top tether strap child
restraint” later in this section for installation instructions.
2. After attaching the child restraint and
before placing the child in it, use force
to push the child restraint from side to
side and tug it forward to make sure
that the child restraint is securely held
in place. It should not move more than
1 inch (25 mm).
3. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD
RESTRAINT
WARNING
O Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts or
harnesses.
O After removing a rear seat head restraint for top tether installation, store
it securely to prevent it from causing
injury to passengers or damage to the
vehicle in case of sudden braking or an
accident. Always replace it and adjust
properly when top tether is no longer in
use.
If your child restraint has a top tether
strap, it must be secured to the anchor
point provided behind its position.
First, adjust the seatback so that it is upright. Then secure the child restraint with
the rear seat belt or the LATCH system
(outboard positions), as applicable.
Remove the head restraint from the seatback. Store it in a secure place. Position
the top tether strap over the top of the
seatback and secure it to the tether anchor bracket that provides the straightest
installation. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instruction
to remove any slack.
For best child restraint fit, see the child
restraint installation instructions in this
section and the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Anchor point locations
Anchor points j5 are located under the
rear parcel shelf finisher.
j1 Anchor point for rear driver’s side
seat
j2 Anchor point for rear center seat
j3 Anchor point for rear right side seat
j4 Anchor point lid. To open, pull up the
anchor point lid.
j5 Anchor point
If you have any questions when installing a top strap child restraint on the
rear seat, consult your INFINITI dealer
for details.
SSS0328
1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION
ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
WARNING
O Never install a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger seat. Supplemental front air bags inflate with great
force. A rear-facing child restraint could
be struck by the supplemental front air
bag in a crash and could seriously injure
or kill your child.
O INFINITI recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat.
However, if you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front passenger seat, move the passenger seat to the
rearmost position.
O A child restraint with a top tether strap
should not be used in the front passenger seat.
O The three-point belt in your vehicle is
equipped with an automatic locking
mode retractor which must be used when
installing a child restraint.
O Failure to use the retractor’s locking
mode will result in the child restraint not
being properly secured. The child restraint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a
sudden stop or collision.
If you must install a child restraint in the
front seat, follow these steps:
SSS0300A
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
Z 04.4.29/F50-D X
1. Position the child restraint on the front
passenger seat. It should be placed in
a front facing direction only. Move the
seat to the rear most position. Adjust
the head restraint to its highest position. Always follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the
rear facing direction and therefore
must not be used in the front seat.
2. The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjust or remove
the head restraint to obtain the correct
child restraint fit. See “Head restraint
adjustment” earlier in this section. If
the head restraint is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to install the
head restraint when the child restraint
is removed. If the seating position does
not have an adjustable head restraint
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage.
Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for belt
routing.
SSS0301B SSS0253D
1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.29/F50-D X
4. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the
belt is fully extended. At this time, the
belt retractor is in the automatic locking
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts
back to emergency locking mode when
the belt is fully retracted.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up jA
on the shoulder belt to remove any
slack in the belt.
6. Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely
held in place. It should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does move
more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again on
the shoulder belt to further tighten the
child restraint. If unable to properly secure the restraint, move the restraint to
another rear seating position and try
again, or try a different child restraint.
Not all child restraints fit in all types of
vehicles.
SSS0254D SSS0331 SSS0302B
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
Z 04.4.29/F50-D X
7. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull
more belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot pull any more belt webbing out
of the retractor, the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode.
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic
locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.
PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
O Infants and small children should always
be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure
to use a child restraint or booster seat
can result in serious injury or death.
O Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible
for even the strongest adult to resist the
forces of a severe accident. The child
could be crushed between the adult and
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
same seat belt around both your child
and yourself.
O INFINITI recommends that the booster
seat be installed in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
O A booster seat must only be installed in a
seating position that has a lap/shoulder
belt. Failure to use a three-point type
seat belt with a booster seat can result in
a serious injury in sudden stop or collision.
O An improperly installed booster seat
could lead to serious injury or death in
an accident.
BOOSTER SEATS
1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.11.29/F50-D X
WARNING
Do not use towels, books, pillows or other
items in place of a booster seat. Items
such as these may move during normal
driving or a collision and result in serious
injury or death. Booster seats are designed
to be used with a lap/shoulder belt.
Booster seats are designed to properly
route the lap and shoulder portions of the
seat belt over the strongest portions of a
child’s body to provide the maximum protection during a collision.
Booster seats of various sizes are offered
by several manufacturers. When selecting
any booster seat, keep the following
points in mind:
O Choose only a booster seat with a
label certifying that it complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
O Check the booster seat in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.
LRS0455 LRS0453
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O Make sure the child’s head will be
properly supported by the booster
seat or vehicle seat. The seatback
must be at or above the center of the
child’s ears. For example, if a low back
booster seat j1 is chosen, the vehicle
seatback must be at or above the center of the child’s ears. If the seatback
is lower than the center of the child’s
ears, a high back booster seat j2
should be used.
O If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the
booster seat and check the various
adjustments to be sure the booster
seat is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and provinces of Canada
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
at all times while the vehicle is being operated.
WARNING
O Improper use of a booster seat can increase the risk or severity of injury for
both the child and other occupants of
the vehicle.
O Follow all of the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use. When purchasing a booster seat,
be sure to select one which will fit your
child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of
booster seats in your vehicle.
O If the booster seat and seat belt are
not used properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision or a sudden
stop greatly increases.
O Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to fit the booster seat, but as
upright as possible.
O After placing the child in the booster
seat and fastening the seat belt, make
sure the shoulder portion of the belt is
away from the child’s face and neck
and the lap portion of the belt does not
cross the abdomen.
O Do not put the shoulder belt behind the
child or under the child’s arm. If you
must install a booster seat in the front
seat, see “Booster seat installation on
front passenger seat” later in this section.
O When your booster seat is not in use,
keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being thrown around in
case of a sudden stop or accident.
CAUTION
Remember that a booster seat left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot. Check
LRS0464
1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
the seating surface and buckles before
placing your child in the booster seat.
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON
REAR SEAT CENTER OR OUTBOARD
POSITIONS
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt automatic
locking mode when using a booster seat with
the seat belts. When you install a booster
seat in the rear seat, follow these steps:
1. Position the booster seat on the seat.
LRS0451
Center position
LRS0452
Outboard position
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
Z 04.11.23/F50-D X
Only place it in a front facing direction. Always follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
2. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the
head restraint to obtain the correct
booster seat fit. See “Head restraint
adjustment” earlier in this section. If
the head restraint is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the booster
seat is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head
restraint and it is interfering with the
proper booster seat fit, try another
seating position or a different booster
seat.
3. Position the lap portion of the seat
belt low and snug on the child’s hips.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt routing.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the top,
middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt routing.
5. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in the “Three-point seat
belt with retractor” earlier in this section.
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
WARNING
INFINITI recommends that child restraints
be installed in the rear seat. However, if
you must install a booster seat in the front
passenger seat, move the passenger seat
to the rearmost position.
If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, follow these steps:
LRS0454
1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. Move the seat to the rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front facing direction. Always follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the
head restraint to obtain the correct
booster seat fit. See “Head restraint
adjustment” earlier in this section. If
the head restraint is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to install
the head restraint when the booster
seat is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head
restraint and it is interfering with the
proper booster seat fit, try another
seating position or a different booster
seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat
belt low and snug on the child’s hips.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the top,
middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in the “Three-point seat
belt with retractor” earlier in this section.
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
section contains important information
concerning the driver and passenger front
impact supplemental air bags, front seat
side-impact supplemental air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and front seat
pre-tensioner seat belts.
Supplemental front impact air bag
system: This system can help cushion the
impact force to the face and chest of the
driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.
Supplemental side-impact air bag
system: This system can help cushion the
impact force to the chest area of the
driver and front passenger in certain side
impact collisions. The front seat sideimpact supplemental air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Supplemental side-impact curtain air bag
system: This system can help cushion the
impact force to the head of occupants in
front and rear outboard seating positions
in certain side impact collisions. The curtain side-impact air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
These supplemental restraint systems are
designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and passenger
seat belts and are not a substitute for
them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a
suitable distance away from the steering
wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this
section for instructions and precautions
on seat belt usage.)
After turning the ignition key to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the systems are
operational. WARNING
O The supplemental front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a
side impact, rear impact, rollover, or
lower severity frontal collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.
O The seat belts and the supplemental
front air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat. The front air bags inflate with
great force. If you are unrestrained,
leaning forward, sitting sideways or out
of position in any way, you are at
greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the supplemental
front air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far away
as practical from the steering wheel or
SSS0131B
1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
instrument panel. Always use the seat
belts.
O The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with sensors
that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The air bag system monitors the
severity of a collision and then inflates
the air bags based on belt usage.
Failure to properly wear seat belts can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
O Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them in side the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the
supplemental front air bag inflates.
SSS0132B
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
SSS0007
SSS0006
SSS0008
SSS0009
SSS0099
SSS0100
1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
WARNING
O Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
O Children may be severely injured or
killed when the supplemental front air
bags, side air bags or curtain sideimpact air bags inflate if they are not
properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in
the rear seat, if possible.
O Also, never install a rear facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating
supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See
“Child restraints” earlier in this section
for details.
SSS0059A SSS0188A
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
WARNING
Supplemental side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag:
O The supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag ordinarily will
not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or lower severity side collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents.
O The seat belts, the supplemental side
air bags and curtain side-impact air
bags are most effective when you are
sitting well back and upright in the
seat. The side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag inflate with great force.
Do not allow anyone to place their
hand, leg or face near the side air bag
on the side of the seatback of the front
seat or near the side roof rails. Do not
allow anyone sitting in the front seats
or rear outboard seats to extend their
hand out of the window or lean against
the door. Some examples of dangerous
riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.
O When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold
onto the seatback of the front seat. If the
supplemental side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be especially
careful with children, who should always
be properly restrained. Some examples
of dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
SSS0140 SSS0159
SSS0162
1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
supplemental side air bag inflation.
1. Crash zone sensor
2. Supplemental curtain side-impact air
bags
3. Supplemental side air bag modules
4. Pre-crash seat belt sensor
5. Supplemental front air bag modules
6. Diagnosis sensor unit
7. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor
8. Satellite sensors
9. Supplemental curtain side-impact air
bag modules
SSS0325
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Supplemental front air bag
system
The driver supplemental air bag is located
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger supplemental air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel above
the glove box. These systems are designed to meet optional certification requirements under U.S. regulations. They
are also permitted in Canada. The optional certification allows front air bags to
be designed to inflate somewhat less
forcefully than previously. However, all of
the information, cautions and warnings in
this manual still apply and must be followed. The front air bags are designed to
inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,
although they may inflate if the forces in
another type of collision are similar to
those of a higher severity frontal impact.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is
not always an indication of proper supplemental air bag operation.
The supplemental air bag system has dual
stage inflators for both the driver and passenger air bags. The system monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the
diagnosis sensor unit and seat belt buckle
sensors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened, inflator operation is based on
the severity of a collision and whether the
seat belts are being used. Only one front
air bag may inflate in a crash, depending
on the crash severity and whether the front
occupants are belted or unbelted. This
does not indicate improper performance of
the system. If you have any questions
about the performance of your air bag system, please contact your INFINITI dealer.
When the supplemental front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
followed by release of smoke. This smoke
is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those
with a history of a breathing condition
should get fresh air promptly.
Supplemental front air bags, along with
the use of seat belts, help to cushion the
impact force on the face and chest of the
front occupants. They can help save lives
and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial
abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags
do not provide restraint to the lower
body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and
the driver and passenger seated upright as
far as practical away from the steering
wheel or instrument panel. The supplemental front air bags inflate quickly in order
to help protect the front occupants. Because
of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the
occupant is too close to or is against the air
bag module during inflation. The air bag will
deflate quickly after the collision is over.
WARNING
O Do not place any objects on the
steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
Such objects may become dangerous
projectiles and cause injury if the
supplemental front air bag inflates.
O Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will
be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
O No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental front air bag system.
1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
This is to prevent accidental inflation of
the supplemental air bag or damage to
the supplemental air bag system.
O Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
O Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes
changes to the steering wheel and the
instrument panel assembly by placing
material over the steering wheel pad and
above the instrument panel, or by installing additional trim material around
the air bag system.
O Work around and on the supplemental
front air bag system should be done by
an INFINITI dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by
an INFINITI dealer. The Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) wiring should not
be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air
bag system.
O A cracked windshield should be replaced
immediately by a qualified repair facility.
A cracked windshield could affect the
function of the supplemental air bag
system.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the supplemental front air bag system and guide the buyer
to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.
Supplemental side air bag and
curtain side-impact air bag system
The supplemental side air bags are located
in the outside of the seatback of the front
seats. The supplemental curtain sideimpact air bags are located in the side roof
rails. These systems are designed to meet
voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk
of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of the information, cautions and
warnings in this manual still apply and
must be followed. The supplemental side
air bags and curtain side-impact air bags
are deSSS0190
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Z 04.11.29/F50-D X
signed to inflate in higher severity side
collisions, although they may inflate if the
forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity side
impact. They are designed to inflate on
the side where the vehicle is impacted.
They may not inflate in certain side collisions on the side where the vehicle is impacted. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is
not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag operation.
When the supplemental side air bag and
curtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly
loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should
be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause
irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get
fresh air promptly.
Supplemental side air bags, along with
the use of seat belts, help to cushion the
impact force on the chest of the front occupants. Curtain side-impact air bags
help to cushion the impact force to the
head of occupants in the front and rear
outboard seating positions. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries.
However, an inflating side air bag and
curtain side-impact air bag may cause
abrasions or other injuries. Supplemental
side air bags and curtain side-impact air
bags do not provide restraint to the lower
body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn
and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the
side air bag. Rear seat passengers should
be seated as far away as practical from
the door finishers and side roof rails. The
side air bags and curtain side-impact air
bag inflate quickly in order to help protect
the out-of-position occupants. Because of
this, the force of the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is
too close to, or is against, these air bag
modules during inflation. The side air bag
and curtain side-impact air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.
WARNING
O Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if the supplemental side
air bag inflates.
O Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain side-impact air bag
system components will be hot. Do not
touch them; you may severely burn
yourself.
O No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
this side air bag and curtain air bag
system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain
air bag or damage to the side air bag
and curtain air bag system.
O Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental side air bag and curtain
side-impact air bag system.
O Tampering with the supplemental side
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seat by placing mate1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
rial near the seatback or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, around the side air bag.
O Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain side-impact air bag system
should be done by an INFINITI dealer.
Installation of electrical equipment
should also be done by an INFINITI
dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*
should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the side air bag system.
* The SRS wiring harnesses connectors
are yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request
that you inform the buyer about the side
air bag and curtain side-impact air bag
system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
Pre-tensioner seat belt system
(front seats)
WARNING
O The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be
reused after activation. It must be replaced together with the retractor and
buckle as a unit.
O If the vehicle becomes involved in a
frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is
not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by your INFINITI
dealer.
O No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This
is to prevent accidental activation of
the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage
to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. Tampering with the pre-tensioner
seat belt system may result in serious
personal injury.
O Work around and on the pre-tensioner
system should be done by an INFINITI
dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by an
INFINITI dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner seat belt system.
O If you need to dispose of the pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact
an INFINITI dealer. Correct pretensioner disposal procedures are set forth
in the appropriate INFINITI Service
Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in conjunction with the
supplemental air bag systems. Working
with the seat belt retractor, it helps
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pre-tensioner is encased with the
seat belt’s retractor. These seat belts are
used the same as conventional seat belts.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise
may be heard. The smoke is not harmful,
but care should be taken not to inhale it
as it may cause irritation and choking.
Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner system, the supplemental air
bag warning light will not come on,
will flash intermittently or will turn on for
7 seconds and remain on after the ignition key has been turned to the ON or
START position. In this case, the pretensioner seat belt may not function properly. They must be checked and repaired.
Take your vehicle to the nearest INFINITI
dealer.
When selling your vehicle, we request
that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner seat belt system and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front air bag and supplemental sideimpact air bag systems are placed in the
vehicle as shown in the illustration.
j1 SRS air bag
The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visors.
j2 SRS side-impact air bag
The warning label is located on the side
of the passenger’s side center pillar.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits of the supplemental
front air bag, supplemental side air bag
and curtain side-impact air bag systems,
and pre-tensioner seat belt. The circuits
monitored by the air bag warning light are
the diagnosis sensor unit, satellite sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag
modules, curtain side-impact air bag
modules, and all related wiring, and pretensioner seat belt.
SSS0330 SPA1097
1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
After turning the ignition key to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after
about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur,
the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain sideimpact air bag systems, and pre-tensioner
seat belt need servicing:
O The supplemental air bag warning
light remains on after approximately 7
seconds after turning the ignition key
to the ON position.
O The supplemental air bag warning
light flashes intermittently.
O The supplemental air bag warning
light does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the supplemental
front air bags, supplemental side air
bags, curtain side-impact air bags and/or
pre-tensioner seat belt may not operate
properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
INFINITI dealer.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is
on, it could mean that the supplemental
front air bag, supplemental side air bag,
curtain side-impact air bag systems and/or
pre-tensioner seat belt will not operate in
an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible.
Repair and replacement procedure
The supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact
air bags and pre-tensioner seat belt are
designed to activate on a one-time-only
basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning
light will remain illuminated after inflation
has occurred. Repair and replacement of
these systems should be done only by an
INFINITI dealer.
When maintenance work is required on
the vehicle, the supplemental front air
bags, side air bags, curtain side-impact
air bags, related parts and pre-tensioner
seat belt should be pointed out to the
person conducting the maintenance. The
ignition key should always be in the LOCK
position when working under the hood or
inside the vehicle.
WARNING
O Once the supplemental front air bag,
side air bag or curtain side-impact air
bag has inflated, the air bag module
will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, if any of the
supplemental front air bags inflate, the
activated pre-tensioner seat belt must
also be replaced. The air bag module
and pre-tensioner seat belt system
should be replaced by an INFINITI
dealer. The air bag modules and pretensioner seat belt system cannot be
repaired.
O The supplemental front air bag, side air
bag and curtain air bag systems and
pre-tensioner seat belt system should
be inspected by an INFINITI dealer if
there is any damage to the front end or
side portion of the vehicle.
O If you need to dispose of the suppleSafety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat belt
system or scrap the vehicle, contact an
INFINITI dealer.
Correct supplemental air bag and pretensioner seat belt system disposal
procedures are set forth in the appropriate INFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause
personal injury.
1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
MEMO
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel.............................................. 2-2
Meters and gauges ........................................... 2-3
Speedometer and odometer......................... 2-4
Tachometer ................................................. 2-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge ............... 2-5
Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-6
Compass .......................................................... 2-6
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders....................................................... 2-10
Checking bulbs.......................................... 2-10
Warning lights........................................... 2-10
Indicator lights ......................................... 2-14
Audible reminders ..................................... 2-16
Security systems ............................................ 2-17
Vehicle security system ............................. 2-17
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ........ 2-18
Windshield wiper and washer switch ............... 2-20
Wiper switch ............................................. 2-20
Rain-sensing auto wipers system ............... 2-21
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch ............................................................ 2-22
Headlight and turn signal switch ..................... 2-22
Xenon headlights ...................................... 2-22
Headlight switch ....................................... 2-23
Turn signal switch ..................................... 2-26
Fog light switch ......................................... 2-27
Hazard warning flasher switch......................... 2-27
Horn............................................................... 2-28
Heated seats .................................................. 2-28
Front heated seat (if so equipped) .............. 2-29
Rear heated seat (if so equipped) ............... 2-29
Climate controlled seat (if so equipped)........... 2-30
Active damper suspension mode select switch. 2-31
Sport mode ............................................... 2-31
Auto mode................................................. 2-31
Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF switch................. 2-32
Clock.............................................................. 2-32
Adjusting the time ..................................... 2-32
Power outlet ................................................... 2-33
Cigarette lighters and ashtrays........................ 2-33
Front ......................................................... 2-33
Rear .......................................................... 2-34
Storage .......................................................... 2-34
Cup holders............................................... 2-34
Sunglasses holder .................................... 2-35
Glove box .................................................. 2-36
Console box .............................................. 2-37
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
Cargo net (if so equipped) ........................ 2-37
Windows ........................................................ 2-38
Power windows ......................................... 2-38
Sunroof .......................................................... 2-40
Sliding the sunroof ................................... 2-40
Auto reverse function (when closing the
sunroof) .................................................... 2-41
Tilting the sunroof..................................... 2-41
Sun shade ................................................ 2-41
If the sunroof does not close.................... 2-41
Rear control cancel switch (if so
equipped) ................................................. 2-41
Rear sun shade (if so equipped)..................... 2-42
Rear door window sun shades (if so
equipped) ................................................. 2-43
Interior lights ................................................ 2-43
Room light ................................................ 2-43
Personal lights ............................................... 2-44
Front ......................................................... 2-44
Rear .......................................................... 2-44
Vanity mirror lights ........................................ 2-45
Trunk light...................................................... 2-46
HomeLink universal transceiver .................... 2-46
Programming HomeLink .......................... 2-47
Programming HomeLink for Canadian
customers ................................................. 2-48
Operating the HomeLink universal
transceiver ................................................ 2-48
Programming trouble diagnosis ................ 2-48
Clearing the programmed information....... 2-49
Reprogramming a single HomeLink
button....................................................... 2-49
If your vehicle is stolen ............................ 2-49
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. Side ventilator (P.4-12)
2. Outside mirror remote control (P.3-19)
3. Headlights/fog lights/turn signal
switch (P.2-22)
4. Steering wheel switch for audio
control (P.4-33)
5. Meters and gauges (P.2-3)
6. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-33)
7. Cruise control main/set switch
(P.5-14)
Intelligent cruise control switch
(P.5-16)
8. Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P.2-20)
9. Ignition switch (P.5-6)
10.Security indicator light (P.2-17)
11.Center ventilator (P.4-12)
12.Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-27)
13.Display, Climate and Audio control
switches/buttons (P.4-2)/Navigation
system*
14.Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P.1-33)
15.Instrument brightness control (P.2-26)
16.Vehicle dynamic control OFF switch
(P.2-32)
17.Hood release handle (P.3-9)SIC2403
INSTRUMENT PANEL
2-2 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
18.Active damper suspension mode
selector (P.2-31)
19.Tilting/telescopic steering wheel
switch (P.3-16)
20.Fuse box cover (P.8-23)
21.Parking brake pedal/parking brake
release pedal (P.5-14)
22.CD changer (P.4-31)
23.Cigarette lighter and ashtray (P.2-33)
24.Clock (P.2-32)
25.Cassette deck (P.4-29)
26.Glove box (P.2-36)
27.Canceling the power to the trunk
switch (P.3-11)
See the page indicated in parentheses for
operating details.
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System
Owner’s Manual. (if so equipped)
1. Engine coolant temperature gauge
2. Warming/indicator lights
3. Fuel gauge
4. Odometer/twin trip odometer
5. Speedometer
6. Cruise control system/Intelligent cruise
control system display
7. Tachometer
SIC2404
METERS AND GAUGES
Instruments and controls 2-3
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
Odometer
The odometer j1 /twin trip odometer j2
are displayed when the ignition key is in
the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
Twin trip odometer
The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.
Changing the display:
Pushing the reset knob j3 changes the
display as follows:
TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A
Resetting the trip odometer:
Pushing the reset knob for more than 1
second to reset the trip odometer to zero.
Elapsed time, driving distance and average speed information is also available,
refer to “trip computer information” in the
“monitor, climate, audio and voiceactivated control systems” section later in
this manual.
SIC2462 SIC2405
2-4 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Do not rev the engine into the red zone jA .
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the
engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature.
The engine coolant temperature is within
the normal range jA when the gauge
needle points within the zone shown in the
illustration.
The engine coolant temperature will vary
with the outside air temperature and
driving conditions.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal
range jA , stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously
damage the engine. See “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section for immediate action required.
SIC2334A SIC2463
Instruments and controls 2-5
Z 04.11.29/F50-D X
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or
down hill.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers Empty.
The indicator light comes on when the
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as
it is convenient, preferably before the
gauge reaches “E”. There will be a small
reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge needle reaches “E”.
The indicates that the fuel filler lid is
located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
O If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the
lamp should turn off. If the lamp
remains on after a few driving trips,
have the vehicle inspected by an
INFINITI dealer.
O For additional information, see “Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” later in
this section.
When the COMP switch jA is pushed, the
compass display jB will indicate the direction of the vehicle’s heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the
compass by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
SIC2464 SIC2406
COMPASS
2-6 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
route. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked 3 complete circles.
To turn off the compass, push jA again.
Instruments and controls 2-7
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north
and geographical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can
sometimes be great enough to cause
false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens:
1. Push the COMP switch for more than 3
seconds. The current zone number will
appear in the display.
2. Find your current location and variance number on the zone map jA .
3. Push the COMP switch until the new
zone number appears in the display.
After you select new zone number, the
display will show a compass direction
within a few seconds.
Inaccurate compass direction:
1. With the display turned on, push the
COMP switch for 3 seconds, until the
zone selection comes up (a number
will be displayed in the mirror compass window).
2. Toggle until correct zone is found and
release switch.
3. It returns to the normal compassSIC0611A
2-8 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
mode within 10 seconds of no switch
activity.
4. If the vehicle changes zone, repeat
steps 1 thru 3. See map.
O If the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked
at an INFINITI dealer.
O The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while
driving up or down a steep hill.
(The compass returns to the correct
compass point when the vehicle
moves to an area where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)
CAUTION
O Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass.
O When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.
Instruments and controls 2-9
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
or Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light
Preview Function warning light (Orange: if so
equipped)
Intelligent cruise control system set indicator
light
Automatic transmission check warning light Seat belt warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)
or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
Charge warning light Automatic transmission position indicatorlight Slip indicator light
Door open warning light Cruise main switch indicator light (Green) Sport mode indicator light
Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise control set indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Low fuel warning light Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system MAINswitch indicator light (White; if so equipped)
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off indicator
light
Low tire pressure warning light Intelligent cruise control system warning light(Orange; if so equipped)
CHECKING BULBS
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key to ON without starting the engine. The following lights will come on:
, or , , , ,
,
The following lights come on briefly and
then go off:
, or , , , ,
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit
in the electrical system. Have the system
checked by your INFINITI dealer.
WARNING LIGHTS
or Anti-lock brake
system (ABS)
warning light
If the light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the anti-lock
brake system is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked by your
INFINITI dealer.
If an abnormality occurs in the system,
the anti-lock function will cease but the
ordinary brakes will continue to operate
normally.
If the light comes on while you are
driving, contact your INFINITI dealer for
repair.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
2-10 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Automatic transmission
check warning light
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the light comes on for 2 seconds. If the
light blinks for approximately 8 seconds,
it may indicate the transmission is not
functioning properly. Have your INFINITI
dealer check and repair the transmission.
or Brake warning
light
This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator:
When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking
brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light:
When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not
applied, stop the vehicle and perform the
following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in
the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct:
Have the warning system checked by
an INFINITI dealer.
WARNING
O Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because
driving it could be dangerous.
O Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
O If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at an
INFINITI dealer.
Charge warning light
If the light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the
engine off and check the generator belt.
If the belt is loose, broken, missing or if
the light remains on, see your INFINITI
dealer immediately.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
Door open warning light
This light comes on when any of the
doors are not closed securely while the
ignition key is ON.
Engine oil pressure warning
light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a
safe area, stop the engine immediately
and call an INFINITI dealer or other authorized repair shop.
Instruments and controls 2-11
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
The oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and doit-yourself” section.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is
safe to do so.
Low fuel warning light
This light comes on when the fuel in the
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
convenient, preferably before the fuel
gauge reaches E.
There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge
needle reaches E.
Low tire pressure warning
light
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this
light comes on for about 1 second and
turns off.
This light warns of low tire pressure.
INFINITI’s low tire pressure warning
system is a tire pressure monitoring
system. It monitors tire pressure of all
tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is
lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure
as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability. Each tire, including the spare,
should be checked monthly when cold
and set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and owner’s manual.
The recommended inflation pressure may
also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure (lower than 27 psi, 190 kPa), the
light will illuminate and the chime will
sound for about 10 seconds. If you select
the tire pressure information in the display, the FLAT TIRE warning message will
be displayed.
For additional information, see “Low tire
pressure warning system” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section and “Flat
tire” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section. Also, you can check the pressure
of all 4 tires on the monitor display. See
“Vehicle information” in the “4. Monitor,
climate, audio and voice-activated control
systems” section.
WARNING
O If the light does not come on with the
key switch turned ON, have the vehicle
checked by an INFINITI dealer as soon
as possible.
O If the light comes on while driving,
2-12 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury. Check
the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label
to turn the low tire pressure warning
light OFF. If the light still comes on
while driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible.
O If your vehicle is equipped with run-flat
tires, you can continue driving after you
have a flat tire. However, remember
that vehicle handling stability is reduced, which could lead to an accident
and personal injury. See “Wheels and
tires” in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section for more details and
make sure to observe the cautions
about run-flat tires. Failure to do so
may result in a serious accident.
O When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not
be indicated and the low tire pressure
warning system will not function. Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
CAUTION
O The low tire pressure warning system is
not a substitute for the regular tire
pressure check. Be sure to check the
tire pressure regularly.
O If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 20 MPH (32 km/h), the low
tire pressure warning system may not
operate correctly.
O Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.
Preview Function warning
light (Orange: if so
equipped)
This light comes on if there is a malfunction in the Preview Function of the brake
system. (ICC system equipped model)
Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten
seat belts. The light blinks for 7 seconds
whenever the ignition key is turned to ON,
and will remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the same
time, the chime will sound for about 6
seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is
securely fastened.
If the light blinks or illuminates even if
the seat belt is fastened, it may indicate
that the pre-crash seat belt system has a
malfunction. Have your INFINITI dealer
check and repair the system.
See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety —
Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section for precautions on
seat belt usage.
Instruments and controls 2-13
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Supplemental air bag
warning light
After turning the ignition key to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag
warning light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the supplemental
front air bag and supplemental side air
bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems
and/or pre-tensioner seat belt are operational.
If any of the following conditions occur,
the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, supplemental curtain
side-impact air bag and pre-tensioner
seat belt needs servicing and your
INFINITI must be taken to your nearest
INFINITI dealer.
O The supplemental air bag warning
light remains on after approximately 7
seconds.
O The supplemental air bag warning
light flashes intermittently.
O The supplemental air bag warning
light does not come on at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental Restraint Systems and/or the pretensioner seat belt may not function properly.
For additional information, see “Supplemental restraint system” in the “1. Safety
— Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is
on, it could mean that the supplemental
front air bag, supplemental side air bag,
curtain side-impact air bag systems and/or
pre-tensioner seat belt will not operate in
an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
Automatic transmission
position indicator light
When the ignition key is turned to the ON
position, the indicator shows the automatic selector shift position. See “Driving
with automatic transmission”, in the “5.
Starting and driving” section.
Cruise main switch
indicator light
The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light goes
out when the main switch is pushed
again. While the cruise main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise control
system is operational.
Cruise control set indicator
light
The light comes on while the vehicle
speed is controlled by the cruise control
system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise
control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by your
INFINITI dealer.
Intelligent cruise control
system MAIN switch
indicator light (White; if so
equipped)
The light comes on when the Intelligent
Cruise Control MAIN switch is pushed.
The light goes out when the MAIN switch
is pushed again. While the MAIN switch
indicator light comes on, the system is
operational.
2-14 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Intelligent cruise control
system warning light
(Orange; if so equipped)
The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the Intelligent Cruise Control
system.
Intelligent cruise control
system set indicator light
(White; if so equipped)
The light comes on while the vehicle
speed is controlled by the intelligent
cruise control system. If the light blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate the Intelligent cruise control system
is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked by your INFINITI dealer.
High beam indicator light
(Blue)
This light comes on when the headlight
high beam is on and goes out when the
low beam is selected.
Malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL)
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes
on steady or blinks while the engine is
running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.
The malfunction indicator lamp may also
come on steady if the fuel filler cap is
loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out
of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel filler
cap is installed and closed tightly, and
that the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons
(14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the lamp
should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.
If this indicator lamp comes on steady for
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it
indicates that the vehicle is not ready for
an emission control system inspection/
maintenance test. See “Readiness for
inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the
“9. Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual.
Operation
The malfunction indicator lamp will come
on in one of two ways:
O Malfunction indicator lamp on steady
— An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the
fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is
loose or missing, tighten or install the
cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
The lamp should turn off after a
few driving trips. If the lamp
does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by an
INFINITI dealer. You do not need to
have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
O Malfunction indicator lamp blinking —
An engine misfire has been detected
which may damage the emission control system.
To reduce or avoid emission control
system damage:
a) Do not drive at speeds above 45
MPH (72 km/h).
b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
c) Avoid steep uphill grades.
d) If possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
The malfunction indicator lamp may
stop blinking and come on steady.
Have the vehicle inspected by an
INFINITI dealer. You do not need to
have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
Instruments and controls 2-15
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having
the emission control system checked and
repaired as necessary could lead to poor
driveability, reduced fuel economy, and
possible damage to the emission control
system.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC
system or the traction control system is
operating, thus alerting the driver to the
fact that the road surface is slippery and
the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.
Sport mode indicator light
This light comes on when the active
damper suspension mode select switch is
set to the SPORT position.
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The light flashes when the turn signal
switch lever or hazard switch is turned
on.
Vehicle dynamic control off
indicator light
The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF.
This indicates the vehicle dynamic control
system and traction control system are
not operating. When the vehicle dynamic
control off indicator light and slip indicator light come on with the vehicle dynamic control system turned on, this light
alerts the driver to the fact that the vehicle dynamic control system’s fail-safe
mode is operating, for example the vehicle dynamic control system may not be
functioning properly. Have the system
checked by your INFINITI dealer. If an
abnormality occurs in the system, the vehicle dynamic control system function will
be canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For additional information, see “Vehicle dynamic control system (VDC)” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Key reminder chime
A chime will sound if the driver side door
is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch (ignition switch is turned to
the ACC, OFF or LOCK position). Remove
the key and take it with you when leaving
the vehicle.
Light reminder chime
A chime will sound when the driver side
door is opened with the light switch in
the or position (ignition switch
is turned to the ACC, OFF or LOCK position).
Turn the light switch off when you leave
the vehicle.
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched
scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon
as possible if the warning sound is heard.
2-16 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Your vehicle has two types of security systems, as follows:
O Vehicle security
O INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
The security condition will be shown by the
security indicator light.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual
and audio alarm signals if someone opens
the doors, hood, or trunk lid when the
system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates
when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but
cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your
vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and
always lock it when unattended. Be aware
of your surroundings, and park in secure,
well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are
available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also
offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.
How to activate the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows.
The system can be activated even if the
windows are open.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock
all doors. The doors can be locked with
the electronic ignition key, power door
lock switch or with the key.
4. Confirm that the security indicator light
comes on. The security indicator light
glows for about 30 seconds and then
blinks. The system is now activated. If,
during this 30 second time period, the
door or trunk lid is unlocked with the
electronic ignition key or the key, or the
ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the
system will not activate. However, when
the trunk lid is closed after being
unlocked with the electronic ignition
key or the key, the system returns to the
armed phase.
Even when the driver and/or passengers
are in the vehicle, the system will activate
with all doors, hood, and trunk lid locked
and ignition key off. When turning the ignition to ACC, the system will be released.
Vehicle security system operation
The vehicle security system will give the
following alarm:
O the headlights blink and the horn
sounds intermittently.
O The alarm automatically turns off after
SIC2132
SECURITY SYSTEMS
Instruments and controls 2-17
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
approximately 1 minute. However, the
alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut
off by unlocking a door with the electronic ignition key or the key.
The alarm is activated by:
O Unlocking the door or opening the trunk
lid without using the button on the electronic ignition key or the key. (Even if
the door is opened by releasing the
door inside lock knob, the alarm will activate.)
O Opening the hood.
How to stop alarm
The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by
pushing the unlock button on the electronic
ignition key or with the key. The alarm will
not stop if the ignition switch is turned to
ACC or ON.
If the system does not operate as described above, have it checked by your INFINITI dealer.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered INFINITI electronic ignition key.
The engine may not start with the registered electronic ignition key under the following conditions:
j1 If metal contacts the electronic ignition
key.
j2 If a device equipped with a transponder
contacts the electronic ignition key.
If the engine fails to start using the registered electronic ignition key (for example,
when interference is caused by another
electronic ignition key, an automated toll
road device or automated payment device
on the key ring), restart the engine using
the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
SIC1611A
2-18 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
5 seconds.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered
electronic ignition key.
If the no start condition re-occurs,
INFINITI recommends placing the registered electronic ignition key on a separate
key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
Statement related to section 15 of FCC
rules for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
System
(CONT ASSY - IMMOBILIZER, ANT ASSY -
IMMOBILIZER)
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANUFAC-
TURE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE
USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE
EQUIPMENT.
Security indicator light
This light jA blinks after 5 seconds have
passed since the ignition switch was
turned to OFF and the ignition key was removed. This function indicates the security
systems equipped on the vehicle are operational.
If a non-registered key is in the ignition
switch, the indicator light comes on.
If the INFINITI Vehicle immobilizer System
is malfunctioning, this light will remain on
while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
SIC1610A
Instruments and controls 2-19
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see your INFINITI
dealer for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer
System service as soon as possible.
Please bring all electronic ignition keys
that you have when visiting your INFINITI
dealer for service.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.
CAUTION
The following could damage the washer
system:
O Do not operate the washer continuously
for more than 30 seconds.
O Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.
WIPER SWITCH
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition key is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at
the following speed:
j1 Low — continuous low speed operation
j2 High — continuous high speed operation
Push the lever up j3 to have one sweep operation of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you j4 to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
SIC2408
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
2-20 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPERS
SYSTEM
The rain-sensing auto wipers system allows the wipers to be set so they turn on
and off automatically.
To set the rain-sensing auto wipers
system:
1. Push the lever down to the INT position j1 .
2. The wiper will sweep once while the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
To turn the rain-sensing auto wipers
system off, push up the lever to the OFF
position, or pull down the lever to the LO
or HI position.
The rain-sensing auto wipers system can
automatically turn on the wiper and adjust the wiper speed depending on the
rainfall and the vehicle speed by using
the rain sensor located on the upper part
of the windshield and the vehicle speed
sensor. The rain-sensing auto wipers will
be turned off when the rain sensor does
not detect rain.
The rain sensor sensitivity level can be
adjusted by turning the switch toward the
front jA (High) or toward the rear jB
(Low).
O High — High sensitive operation
O Low — Low sensitive operation
If the rain-sensing auto wipers system
malfunctions, the rain-sensing auto
wipers system will not operate, but the
speed sensitive wiper system will operate.
The rain-sensing auto wipers system can
be cancelled. For more information, see
“Vehicle information” in the “4. Monitor,
climate, audio and voice-activated control
systems” section.
CAUTION
O Do not touch the rain sensor as it might
operate unexpectedly and injure you.
O The rain-sensing auto wipers may not
operate if rain does not hit the rain
sensor even if it is raining.
O The rain-sensing auto wipers may not
operate when the windshield surface
temperature becomes over 158°F
(70°C).
O The rain-sensing auto wipers may operate unexpectedly or may not operate
when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or stickers are stuck on or around the sensor.
SIC2409
Instruments and controls 2-21
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
To defog/defrost the rear window glass
and outside mirrors:
Start the engine and push the switch jA on.
The indicator light jB will come on. Push
the switch again to turn the defroster off.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the
rear window defroster.
XENON HEADLIGHTS
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
O When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or
disassemble. Always have your xenon
headlights replaced at an INFINITI
dealer.
O Xenon headlights provide considerably
more light than conventional headlights.
If they are not correctly aimed, they
might temporarily blind an oncoming
driver or the driver ahead of you and
cause a serious accident. If headlights
are not aimed correctly, immediately
take your vehicle to an INFINITI dealer
and have the headlights adjusted correctly.
When the xenon headlight is initially
turned on, its brightness or color varies
slightly. However, the color and brightness
will soon stabilize.
SIC2410
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR
DEFROSTER SWITCH
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
2-22 Instruments and controls
Z 05.2.25/F50-D X
O The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off operation. It is generally desirable not to
turn off the headlights for short intervals, (for example, when the vehicle
stops at a traffic signal). Even when the
daytime running lights are active
(Canada only), the xenon headlights do
not turn on. This way the life of the
xenon headlights is not reduced.
O If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start
blinking, or the color of the light will
become reddish. If one or more of the
above signs appear, contact an
INFINITI dealer. HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Lighting
j1 Turn the switch to the position:
The front park, side marker, tail, license
plate and instrument lights will come
on.
j2 Turn the switch to the position:
Headlights will come on and all the
other lights remain on.
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running
to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
SIC2411
Instruments and controls 2-23
Z 04.11.29/F50-D X
Autolight system
The autolight system allows the headlights
to be set so they turn on and off automatically.
To set the autolight system:
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position j1 .
2. Turn the ignition key to ON.
3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
switch to the OFF, , or position.
The autolight system can turn on the headlights automatically when it is dark, turn off
the headlights when it is light, and keep
the headlights on for up to 180 seconds after you turn the key to OFF and open any
door then close all the doors.
Automatic headlights off delay
For automatic headlights off delay setting,
see “Automatic headlights off delay” in the
“4. Monitor, climate, audio and voiceactivated control systems” section.
Be sure not to put anything on top of the
photo sensor jA located on the top righthand side of the instrument panel. The
photo sensor controls the autolight; if it is
covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is
dark and the headlights will illuminate.
SIC2412 SAA0642A
2-24 Instruments and controls
Z 05.2.25/F50-D X
Headlight beam select
j1 To select the low beam, put the lever in
the neutral position as shown.
j2 To select the high beam, push the lever
forward while the switch is in the
position. Pull it back to select the
low beam.
j3 Pulling the lever toward you will flash
the headlight high beam even when the
headlight switch is in the OFF position.
Battery saver system
O When the headlight switch is in the
or position while the ignition
key is in the ON position, the lights will
automatically turn off 45 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to
the OFF position. However, the lights
will turn off if the driver’s or front passenger’s door is opened in this condition.
O When the headlight switch remains in
the or position after the
lights automatically turn off, the lights
will turn on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position from the OFF
position.
CAUTION
O Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
O Never leave the light switch on when the
engine is not running for extended periods of time even if the headlights turn
off automatically.
Daytime running light system
(Canada only)
The daytime running lights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the
engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate
with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the position. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the daytime running
lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking
brake is released. The daytime running
lights will remain on until the ignition
switch is turned off.
SIC2413
Instruments and controls 2-25
Z 04.11.30/F50-D X
WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on.
It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
Instrument brightness control
The instrument brightness control operates
when the light switch is in the AUTO (when
lighting), or position with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Turn the control to jA direction (darken) or
jB direction (brighten) to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights.
When the control is turned in the maximum
brightening direction, the light intensity
will be at maximum. When the control is
turned in the maximum darkening direction, the light will be turned off.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
j1 Turn signal
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.
j2 Lane change signal
To indicate a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the point where lights begin
flashing.
SIC2417 SIC2418
2-26 Instruments and controls
Z 04.11.29/F50-D X
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then
turn the switch to the position. To
turn them off, turn the switch to the OFF
position.
The headlights must be on for the fog
lights to operate (except for the daytime
running light).
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will
flash.
WARNING
O If stopping for an emergency, be sure
to move the vehicle well off the road.
O Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
O Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch either off or on.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
SIC2465 SIC1616A
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-27
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
To sound the horn, push the center pad
area jA of the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering
with the supplemental front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION
O The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
O Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
O Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket,
cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the
seat may become overheated.
O Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to
the heater.
O Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
O When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, thinner, or any similar
materials.
O If any abnormalities are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked
by your INFINITI dealer.
SIC2419
HORN HEATED SEATS
2-28 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
FRONT HEATED SEAT (if so
equipped)
The front seats are warmed by built-in
heaters. The switches located on the center
console can be operated independently
(driver side seat jA and front passenger
side seat jB ) of each other.
1. Start the engine.
2. Select heat range.
j1 For high heat, push the (High)
side of the switch.
j2 For low heat, push the (Low)
side of the switch.
j3 For no heat, the switch has a center
OFF position between low and high.
The indicator light in the switch jC will
illuminate when low or high is selected.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater
on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed,
or before you leave the vehicle, be sure
to turn the switch to the off position
(center) j3 .
REAR HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)
The rear outboard seats are warmed by
built-in heaters. The switches, located on
the inside of the rear door, can be operated
independently of each other.
1. Start the engine.
2. Select heat range.
j1 For low heat, push the LO (Low)
switch.
j2 For high heat, push the HI (High)
switch.
SIC2420 SIC2421
Instruments and controls 2-29
Z 04.11.29/F50-D X
The indicator light in the switch jA
will illuminate when low or high is selected.
To turn off the heater, push the illuminated switch once again.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater
on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed,
or before you leave the vehicle, be
sure to turn off the switch.
The climate controlled seat warms and
cools down the front seats by blowing
warm or cool air from the surface of the
seat. The switches located on the seats
can be operated independently of each
other.
1. Start the engine.
2. Select HEAT jA or COOL jB by pushing
either side of the switch.
The climate controlled seat controls
the amount of the air and its temperature according to the number on the
dial; higher is more.
3. Adjust the desired amount of the air
using the control dial jC .
HEAT position: 1 (Low) ; 4 (High)
COOL position: 1 (Low) ; 4 (High)
When cool position 1 is selected, cooling does not operate, air at room temperature will be provided.
The climate controlled seat blower remains on low speed for approximately
60 seconds after turning the switch on
or selecting the desired temperature.
4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
or cooled, and/or before you leave the
vehicle, be sure to turn the switch to
the OFF position (center) jD .
To check the air filter for the climate
controlled seat, contact your INFINITI
dealer.
CAUTION
O The battery could run down if the climate controlled seat is operated while
the engine is not running.
O Do not use the climate controlled seat
for extended periods or when no one is
using the seat.
SIC2422
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT (if so
equipped)
2-30 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket,
cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the
seat may become overheated.
O Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to
the climate controlled seat.
O Any liquid spilled on the seat should be
removed immediately with a dry cloth.
O The climate controlled seat has an air
filter. Do not operate climate controlled
seat without an air filter. This may result in damage to the system.
O When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, thinner, or any similar materials.
O If any abnormalities are found or the
climate controlled seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the
system checked by your INFINITI
dealer.
The active damper suspension controls
damping force and helps minimize the
movement of the vehicle body. It helps
stable driving when the vehicle moves up
and down on large rolling roads or when
the vehicle body leans during cornering
with a high centrifugal force.
The damping force of the shock absorbers
can be adjusted to the level you desire.
Set the switch to the position you desire
while the ignition switch is ON.
SPORT MODE jA
Set the switch to the SPORT position
when you desire a firm feeling all the
time.
AUTO MODE jB
Set the switch to the AUTO position for
normal driving. The damping force will automatically adjust according to the road
surface and driving conditions.
SIC1503A
ACTIVE DAMPER SUSPENSION MODE
SELECT SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-31
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) System ON
for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To cancel the Vehicle Dynamic Control
System (VDC), push the VDC OFF switch to
turn off the system. The indicator
will come on.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn ON the system. See
“Vehicle dynamic control system (VDC)” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section.
If the power supply is disconnected, the
clock will not indicate the correct time.
Readjust the time.
ADJUSTING THE TIME
To adjust the time, turn and hold the adjusting knob jA .
SIC1619 SIC2423
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL OFF
SWITCH
CLOCK
2-32 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Power outlet is located on the back of the
center console.
To open, pull up the power outlet lid as illustrated.
CAUTION
O The outlet and plug may be hot during or
immediately after use.
O Do not use with accessories that exceed
a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do
not use double adapters or
more than one electrical accessory.
O Use power outlet with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
O Avoid using power outlet when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
O This power outlet is not designed for use
with a cigarette lighter unit.
O Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature fuse
may open.
O Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,
be sure the electrical accessory being
used is turned OFF.
O When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water to contact the
outlet.
FRONT
To open the ashtray lid, push the upper
side of the lid jA as illustrated.
The cigarette lighter operates when the
SIC1932
SIC2424
POWER OUTLET CIGARETTE LIGHTERS AND ASHTRAYS
Instruments and controls 2-33
Z 04.11.29/F50-D X
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Push the lighter in all the way jB , then release it. When the lighter is heated, it will
spring out. Return the lighter to its
original position after use.
To empty the ashtray, pull up on the horizontal bar and remove the tray jC .
WARNING
The cigarette lighter should not be used
while driving so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation.
CAUTION
O The cigarette lighter socket is a power
source for the cigarette lighter element
only. The use of the cigarette lighter
socket as a power source for any other
accessory is not recommended.
O Do not use any other power outlet for
an accessory lighter.
REAR
To open the ashtray lid, pull up the lid jA
as illustrated.
To empty the ashtray, pull up on the horizontal bar and remove the tray jB .
CUP HOLDERS
WARNING
The cup holder should not be used while
driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
CAUTION
O Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
O Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an accident.
SIC2425
STORAGE
2-34 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Front:
Push the button jA to open the cup
holder lid.
Use the cup holder properly and according to the size of the cups.
The front cup holder inner case can be removed as illustrated jB to hold bigger
bottles.
Rear:
Push the button jA to open the cup
holder.
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
The sunglasses holder can be opened by
pushing the button jA .
WARNING
O The sunglasses holder should not be
used while driving so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
O Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to prevent an accident.
SIC2426 SIC2427 SIC2466
Instruments and controls 2-35
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
CAUTION
O Do not use for anything other than
glasses.
O Do not leave glasses in the sunglasses
holder while parking in direct sunlight.
The heat may damage the glasses.
GLOVE BOX
To open the glove box, pull the handle
j1 .
To close, push the lid in until the lock
latches.
To lock j2 /unlock j3 the glove box, use
the emergency key or wallet key.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.
SIC2428
2-36 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
CONSOLE BOX
Upper part:
O Push the button on the side of the lid
jA to open the upper part.
O The lid can be opened either from the
driver or front passenger side.
O The front part jB is designed to be
used as a coin case.
To open the lid, the right or the left side
must be closed securely.
Bottom case:
Push the button on the front of the lid jC
to open the lids.
To close the lid, manually push the lid
down.
WARNING
The center console box should not be used
while driving so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation.
CARGO NET (if so equipped)
The cargo net helps keep packages in the
cargo area from moving around while your
vehicle is driven.
To install the cargo net, attach the hooks
to the retainers jA .
CAUTION
Avoid keeping heavy objects in the net.
SIC2388 SIC2429
Instruments and controls 2-37
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
O Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before closing
the windows. Use the window lock
switch to prevent unexpected use of
the power windows.
O Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become
trapped in the window. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
The power windows operate when the ignition key is in the ON position, and for
about 45 seconds after the ignition key is
turned to the ACC or OFF position. If the
driver’s or front passenger’s door is
opened during this period of about 45
seconds, power to the windows is cancelled.
Main power window switch
(driver’s side)
1. Rear left passenger side window
2. Driver side window
3. Rear right passenger side window
4. Front passenger side window
5. Window lock button
To open or close the window, push down
jA or pull up jB the switch and hold it.
The main switch (driver side switches) will
open or close all the windows.
Locking passenger’s windows
When the lock button jC is pushed in,
only the driver side window can be
opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.
SIC2430
WINDOWS
2-38 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Passenger side power window
switch
The passenger side switch will open or
close only the corresponding window. To
open or close the window, push down jA
or pull up jB and hold it.
Automatic operation (For all door
windows)
To fully open or close the window, completely push down or pull up the switch
and release it; it need not be held. The
window will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the window, just push
or lift the switch in the opposite direction.
A light push or pull on the switch will
cause the window to open or close until
the switch is released.
Auto reverse function
If the control unit detects something
caught in the window as it is closing, the
window will be immediately lowered.
The auto reverse function can be activated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition key is
in the ON position or for 45 seconds after
the ignition key is turned to the OFF position. If the driver’s or front passenger’s
door is opened during this period of
about 45 seconds, power to the windows
is cancelled.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar
to something being caught in the window
occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.
SIC2448 SIC2431
Instruments and controls 2-39
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
WARNING
O In an accident you could be thrown
from the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
O Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of
the sunroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the sunroof is
closing.
CAUTION
O Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the sunroof before opening.
O Do not place any heavy object on the
sunroof or surrounding area.
The sunroof operates when the ignition
key is in the ON position, or for about 45
seconds after the ignition key is turned to
the ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s, or
passenger’s door is opened during this
period of about 45 seconds, power to the
sunroof is canceled.
SLIDING THE SUNROOF
To open the roof, push and hold the
switch to the open side jA .
To close the roof, push and hold the
switch to the closed side jB .
Automatic operation
To fully open or close the sunroof, completely push the switch to the open side
jC or close side jD ; it need not be held.
The sunroof will automatically open or
close all the way. To stop the sunroof,
just push the switch toward the close or
open side, or push the up jE or down jF
SIC2432
SUNROOF
2-40 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
side of the tilt switch.
AUTO REVERSE FUNCTION (WHEN
CLOSING THE SUNROOF)
If the control unit detects something
caught in the sunroof as it is closing, the
sunroof will immediately open backward.
The auto reverse function can be activated
when the sunroof is closed by automatic
operation when the ignition key is in the
ON position or for 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ACC or OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the sunroof occurs.
TILTING THE SUNROOF
To tilt up, first close the sunroof, then push
and hold the up side of the tilt switch jE .
To tilt down the sunroof, push and hold the
down side jF .
SUN SHADE
Open/close the sun shade by sliding it
backward/forward.
The shade will open automatically when
the sunroof is opening. However, it must be
closed manually.
IF THE SUNROOF DOES NOT CLOSE
Have your INFINITI dealer check and repair
the sunroof.
REAR CONTROL CANCEL SWITCH (if
so equipped)
The rear control cancel switch is located on
the overhead console.
Pushing the rear control cancel switch to
the cancel side will inactivate the following
switches in the rear center armrest.
O Air conditioner
O Audio
SIC2076
Instruments and controls 2-41
Z 05.2.25/F50-D X
CAUTION
O To avoid personal injury, keep your
hands, fingers and head away from the
sun shade arm, arm rail and screen
inlet port.
O Do not allow children near the rear sun
shade system. They could be injured.
O Do not place objects on or near the rear
sun shade. This could cause improper
operation or damage it.
O Do not pull or push the rear sun shade.
This could cause improper operation or
damage it.
The rear sun shade operates when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.
The rear sun shade switches are located
on the front overhead console and the
rear armrest.
To raise the screen, push the upper side
of the switch j1 .
To lower the screen, push the lower side
of the switch j2 .
The switch need not be held.
CAUTION
O Do not place objects (such as newspapers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the screen
inlet port. Doing so may entangle these
objects in the screen when it is extending or retracting, causing improper operation or damage to the screen.
O Do not push the sun shade arm with
your hands, etc., as this may deform it.
Improper operation or damage to the
screen may result.
O Do not put any object into the screen
inlet port as this may result in improper
operation or damage the screen.
O Do not hang any object on the arm rail
as this may result in improper operation or damage the screen.
O Do not forcefully pull the screen. Doing
so may elongate the screen. Improper
operation or damage to the screen may
result.
SIC2433
REAR SUN SHADE (if so equipped)
2-42 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
REAR DOOR WINDOW SUN
SHADES (if so equipped)
The rear door window sun shades are
built in the door sash.
To use the shade, pull it out and hang it
on the hooks jA .
To fold the shade, release it from the
hooks gently.
ROOM LIGHT
The room light has a three-position
switch.
While the switch is in the center O position j1 , the front and rear personal lights
will illuminate under the following conditions:
O driver’s door is unlocked.
—remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds.
O driver’s door is opened.
—remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds after driver’s door is closed.
O ignition key is removed from key cylinder.
—remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds.
The lights will go off when the ignition
key is in the ACC position, or the driver’s
door is closed and locked.
The lights will also go off after 30 minutes
while doors are open.
When some doors are opened, the door
step light for each open door and some
personal lights will come on, and the
closed door’s personal lights will darken.
See “Personal lights” later in this section.
The amount of time that the light remains
on can be adjusted. See “Vehicle information” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio
and voice-activated control systems” section.
When the switch is pushed to the “ON”
position j2 , the light will illuminate.
When the switch is pushed to the “OFF”
position j3 , the room light does not illuminate, regardless of any condition.
SIC2434 SIC2447
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Instruments and controls 2-43
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
FRONT
Push the button as illustrated to turn
on/off the light.
REAR
The lights will turn on/off depending on
what side of the switch is pushed:
j1 The light stays on when pushed to this
position.
j2 When the door is opened, both the
right and left lights come on (opened
door side illuminates brighter). They
turn off when the door is closed. If the
interior light switch is in OFF position,
the personal light will not turn on
when the any of the doors are opened.
See “Interior lights” earlier in this section.
SIC1633A SIC1723A
PERSONAL LIGHTS
2-44 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
j3 When the switch is pushed, both right
and left lights come on.
Console light
The light will turn on when the headlight
switch is turned to the AUTO, or
position.
The light on the vanity mirror will turn on
when the cover on the vanity mirror jA is
opened.
When the cover is closed, the light will
turn off.
SIC2435 SIC2436
VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS
Instruments and controls 2-45
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is
opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the
light will turn off.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the
functions of up to three individual handheld transmitters into one built-in device.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver
power will automatically turn off 30 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to the off position.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver:
O Will operate most Radio Frequency
(RF) devices such as garage doors,
gates, home and office lighting, entry
door locks and security systems.
O Is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
No separate batteries are required. If
the vehicle’s battery is discharged or
is disconnected, HomeLink will retain
all programming.
Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original
transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases).
Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes.
For additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink ” later in this section.
WARNING
O Do not use the HomeLink Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage
door and then automatically stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or
death.
O During the programming procedure,
your garage door or security gate will
open or close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage
door, gate, etc. that you are
programming.
TRUNK LIGHT HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
2-46 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
off while programming the HomeLink
Universal Transceiver.
PROGRAMMING HomeLink
To program your HomeLink Transceiver to
operate a garage door, gate, or entry door
opener, home or office lighting, you need
to be at the same location as the device.
Note: Garage door openers (manufactured
after 1996) have “rolling code protection”.
To program a garage door opener equipped
with “rolling code protection”; you will
need to use a ladder to get up to the garage
door opener motor to be able to access the
“smart or learn” program button.
1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outer
HomeLink buttons (to clear the
memory) until the indicator light jA
blinks (after 20 seconds). Release both
buttons.
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches away from the
HomeLink surface.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously push
and hold both the HomeLink button
you want to program and the hand-held
transmitter button.
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink flashes,
changing from a “slow blink” to a
“rapid blink”. This could take up to 90
seconds. When the indicator light
flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming. To activate the garage door or other programmed device, push and hold the
SIC2019A SIC2437
Instruments and controls 2-47
Z 04.11.29/F50-D X
programmed HomeLink button - releasing when the device begins to activate.
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink
blinks rapidly for two seconds and then
turns solid, HomeLink has picked up a
“rolling code” garage door opener
signal. You will need to proceed with
the next steps to train the HomeLink
to complete the programming which
may require a ladder and another
person for convenience.
6. Push and release the training button located on the garage door opener’s
motor to activate the “training mode”.
This button is usually located near the
antenna wire that hangs down from the
motor. If the wire originates from under
a light lens, you will need to remove the
lens to access the training button.
NOTE:
Once you have pushed and released the
Training button on the garage door opener’s motor and the “training light” is lit,
you have 30 seconds in which to perform
step 7. Use the help of a second person for
convenience to assist when performing
this step.
7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pushing
and releasing the garage door opener
program button, firmly push and release the HomeLink button you’ve just
programmed. Push and release the
HomeLink button up to three times to
complete the training.
8. Your HomeLink button should now be
programmed. (To program the remaining HomeLink buttons for additional door or gate openers, follow
steps 2-8 only.)
NOTE:
Do not repeat step one unless you want to
“clear” all previously programmed
HomeLink buttons).
If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, please refer to the HomeLink web
site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800355-3515.
PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required
hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your
hand-held transmitter to HomeLink , continue to push and hold the HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4 under “Programming HomeLink ”) while you push
and re-push (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator
light flashes rapidly (indicating successful
programming).
NOTE:
If programming a garage door opener,
etc., it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener
components.
OPERATING THE HomeLink
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver
(once programmed) may now be used to
activate the garage door, etc. To operate,
simply push the appropriate programmed
HomeLink Universal Transceiver button.
The red indicator light will illuminate while
the signal is being transmitted.
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink does not quickly learn
the hand-held transmitter information:
O replace the hand-held transmitter bat2-48 Instruments and controls
Z 04.11.29/F50-D X
teries with new batteries.
O position the hand-held transmitter
with its battery area facing away from
the HomeLink surface.
O push and hold both the HomeLink
and hand-held transmitter buttons
without interruption.
O position the hand-held transmitter 2
to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm) away from
the HomeLink surface. Hold the
transmitter in that position for up to
15 seconds. If HomeLink is not programmed within that time, try holding
the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at
all times.
If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the INFINITI Consumer Affairs Department. The phone
numbers are located in the Foreword of
this Owner’s Manual.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
Individual buttons cannot be cleared,
however to clear all programming, push
and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to
flash (approximately 20 seconds).
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HomeLink BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink Universal
Transceiver button, complete the following.
1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink
button. Do not release the button until
step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5
inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the
HomeLink surface.
3. Push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.
4. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The
new device can be activated by pushing
the HomeLink button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect
any other programmed HomeLink buttons.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should
change the codes of any non-rolling code
device that has been programmed into
HomeLink . Consult the Owner’s Manual
of each device or call the manufacturer or
dealer of those devices for additional information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.
FCC Notice:
This device complies with FCC rules part
15. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference and (2) This
device must accept any interference that
may be received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device.
Instruments and controls 2-49
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
FCC I.D.: CB2V67690
2-50 Instruments and controls
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys (electronic ignition key)............................ 3-2
Doors ............................................................... 3-4
Locking with key ......................................... 3-4
Opening and closing windows with the
key.............................................................. 3-4
Locking with inside lock knob..................... 3-5
Locking with power door lock switch .......... 3-5
Child safety rear door lock.......................... 3-6
Remote keyless entry system ........................... 3-6
How to use remote keyless entry system .... 3-7
Hood ................................................................ 3-9
Trunk lid......................................................... 3-10
Opener operation ...................................... 3-10
Key operation............................................ 3-10
Cancelling the power to the trunk lid ........ 3-11
Auto closure ............................................ 3-11
Auto open & close trunk lid ...................... 3-11
Emergency trunk lid release...................... 3-14
Fuel filler lid................................................... 3-15
Opener operation ...................................... 3-15
Fuel filler cap ............................................ 3-15
Tilting telescopic steering column .................. 3-16
Tilt or telescopic operation........................ 3-17
Sun visors ...................................................... 3-17
Using the sun visors ................................. 3-17
Mirrors .......................................................... 3-18
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror and outside
mirror (driver’s side only) .......................... 3-18
Outside mirrors......................................... 3-19
Automatic drive positioner ............................ 3-20
Memory storage function .......................... 3-20
Entry/exit function ................................... 3-22
System operation...................................... 3-22
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. Master electronic ignition key 1 (With
built-in transponder chip)
2. Master electronic ignition key 2 (With
built-in transponder chip)
3. Key number plate
4. Wallet key
5. Key case (Card type)
The master electronic ignition keys have a
transponder.
When the master electronic ignition key is
inserted in the ignition switch, verification
of the transponder ID will start automatically. If the ID code is judged to be correct, the ignition switch lock will be released, allowing the key to turn and the
engine to start.
You can only drive your vehicle using the
master electronic ignition keys which are
registered to the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. These keys have a transponder
chip. The wallet key and emergency key
cannot be used to start and drive your vehicle.
The emergency key and wallet key can be
used for all locks.
When the key case with the wallet key is
placed into your wallet, be careful not to
apply excessive force to the wallet as it
or other cards could be damaged.
Do not allow the electronic ignition key,
which contains an electrical transponder,
to come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system function.
SPA1811
KEYS (Electronic ignition key)
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
How to use the emergency key
If the remote control system cannot be
used due to a discharged battery, use the
emergency key jA to lock or unlock the
doors, glove box and trunk lid.
Removing the key
O Release the lock knob at the rear of
the master electronic ignition key and
remove the emergency key as illustrated.
O To install the emergency key to the
master electronic ignition key, securely lock the lock knob and then
check that the emergency key will not
move.
O The emergency key cannot be used to
start the engine, but it can be used to
release the steering lock.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
keys specific to your vehicle. A key
number plate is supplied with your key.
Record the key number and keep the key
number plate in a safe place, except in
the vehicle, in case of the need to duplicate the keys.
The key can only be duplicated using an
original key or the original key number.
The key number is required when you
have lost all of the keys and do not have
the original key to duplicate from. If the
key is lost, or you need extra keys, provide an original key or the key number to
an INFINITI dealer.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
KEY - Master electronic ignition keys:
As many as 4 INFINITI electronic ignition
keys can be used with one vehicle. New
keys must be registered to the INFINITI
Vehicle Immobilizer System components
in your vehicle by your INFINITI dealer.
Bring all INFINITI electronic ignition keys
to your INFINITI dealer for registration.
The registration process will erase all
memory of the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System components so all keys require registration.
SPA1812
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
WARNING
O Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping to
prevent persons from being thrown
from the vehicle. This also helps keep
children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help
keep out intruders.
O Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
O Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
LOCKING WITH KEY
The power door lock system allows you to
lock or unlock all doors simultaneously.
O Turning the driver’s door key to the
front of the vehicle j1 will lock all
doors.
O Turning the driver’s door key one time
to the rear of the vehicle j2 will unlock the driver’s door. From that position, returning the key to neutral
(where the key can only be removed
and inserted.) and turning it to the
rear again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors.
OPENING AND CLOSING
WINDOWS WITH THE KEY
The driver’s door key operation allows you
to open and close all door windows simultaneously.
To open the windows, turn the driver’s
door key to the rear of the vehicle for
longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked.
To close the windows, turn the driver’s
door key to the front of the vehicle for
longer than 1 second after the door is
locked.
The rear door windows will operate 0.5
second after the front windows’ operation.
The door windows will open or close
while turning the driver’s door key. This
function will operate after the ignition
switch is off and 45 seconds passed or either of the front doors are opened.
SPA1813
DOORS
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB
To lock the doors without a key, move the
inside lock knob to the lock position j1 ,
then close the door.
When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock, move the inside lock knob to
the unlock position j2 .
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
Operating the lock-unlock switch will lock
or unlock all doors. (driver and front passenger sides)
To lock the doors, push the power door
lock switch located on the driver’s or front
passenger’s armrest to the lock position
j1 with the driver’s or front passenger’s
door open, then close the door.
When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock, push the power door lock
switch to the unlock position j2 .
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver
or front passenger) is moved to the lock
position with the key in the ignition and
any door open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. This helps to prevent
the keys from being accidentally locked
inside the vehicle.
SPA1814 SPA1815
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
The child safety lock helps prevent doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.
When the lever is in the lock position j1 ,
the rear door can be opened only from
the outside.
To disengage, move the levers to the unlock position j2 .
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors,
open all windows, release the trunk lid
and activate the panic alarm by using the
electronic ignition key (electronic key)
from outside the vehicle.
Before locking the doors, make sure the
key is not left in the vehicle.
The electronic key can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from
the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.)
As many as 4 electronic keys can be used
with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional
electronic keys, contact your INFINITI
dealer.
The electronic keys will not function
when:
O the battery is discharged,
O the distance between the vehicle and
the electronic key is over 33 ft (10 m),
O the electronic key is in the ignition
switch.
CAUTION
The following conditions or occurrences
will damage the electronic key.
O Do not allow the electronic key to become wet.
O Do not drop the electronic key.
O Do not strike the electronic key sharply
against another object.
O Do not place the electronic key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
If a electronic key is lost or stolen,
INFINITI recommends erasing the ID code
of that electronic key. This will prevent the
electronic key from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding
the erasing procedure, please contact an
INFINITI dealer.
SPA1816
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Setting hazard indicator and horn
mode
The factory setting of the remote keyless
entry system is in hazard indicator and
horn mode.
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when
the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps
once. When the UNLOCK button is
pushed, the hazard indicator flashes
once.
If hazard indicator and horn mode is not
necessary, you can switch to hazard indicator only mode by following the
switching procedure.
In hazard indicator only mode, when the
LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes twice.
When the UNLOCK button is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the horn operates.
(Switching procedure)
Push the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on
the electronic key simultaneously for
more than 2 seconds to switch from one
mode to the other.
When pushing the buttons to set hazard
indicator only mode, the hazard indicator
flashes 3 times.
When pushing the buttons to set hazard
indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps
once.
The mode also can be set on the setting
display. See “4. Monitor, climate, audio
and voice-activated control systems” section.
SPA1260
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Locking doors
1. Remove the ignition key.
2. Close all the doors.
3. Push the LOCK button j1 on the electronic key.
4. All the doors will lock.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and
the horn chirps once.
O When the LOCK button is pushed with
all doors locked, the hazard indicator
flashes twice and the horn chirps once
to indicate that the doors are already
locked.
Unlocking doors
1. Push the UNLOCK button j2 on the
electronic key once.
O Only the driver’s door unlocks
O The hazard indicator flashes once.
O The interior light turns on and the
light timer activates for 30 seconds
when the switch is in the center j position.
2. Push the UNLOCK button on the electronic key again within 5 seconds.
O All doors unlock
O The hazard indicator flashes once.
5 minutes after pushing the UNLOCK button, all doors will be locked automatically
under following conditions.
O When any door is not opened.
O When the ignition key is not set in the
ON position.
The interior light can be turned off
without waiting for 30 seconds by turning
the ignition switch to the ON position or
by locking the doors with the electronic
key.
Opening windows
The electronic key operation allows you to
open all door windows simultaneously.
O To open the windows’ push the UNLOCK button j2 on the electronic key
for longer than 3 seconds after the
door is unlocked.
The rear door windows will operate 0.5
second after the front windows’ operation.
The door windows will open while
pushing the UNLOCK button on the electronic key. This function will operate after
the ignition switch is off and 45 seconds
passed or either the front door is opened.
This opening windows function of the
electronic key can be suspended. Please
contact an INFINITI dealer.
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the electronic key.
Releasing the trunk lid
1. Push the trunk button j3 on the electronic key for longer than 0.5 seconds
with the key removed from the key cylinder.
SPA1830
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
2. The trunk lid opens.
The trunk lid will not open when the
power to the trunk lid is cancelled. See
“Trunk lid” later in this section for this
function. When the power to the trunk lid
is cancelled, the trunk lid can be opened
only with the key.
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel
threatened, you may activate the alarm to
call attention as follows:
1. Push the panic button j4 on the electronic key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
2. The vehicle security alarm and headlights will stay on for 30 seconds.
3. The panic alarm stops when:
O It has run for 30 seconds, or
O The LOCK or UNLOCK button is
pushed, or
O The panic button on the electronic
key is pushed for longer than 0.5
seconds.
1. Pull the hood lock release handle j1
located below the instrument panel;
the hood will then spring up slightly.
2. Pull the lever j2 at the front of the
hood with your fingertips and raise
the hood.
3. When closing the hood, slowly close
the hood and make sure it locks into
place.
WARNING
O Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the hood
to fly open and result in an accident.
O If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.
SPA1268A
HOOD
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
WARNING
O Do not drive with the trunk lid open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See
“Exhaust gas” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
O Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the
trunk closed, when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys. OPENER OPERATION
The trunk lid release switch is located under the driver’s armrest.
To open the trunk lid, pull the release
switch jA . To close, push the trunk lid
down.
KEY OPERATION
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To close remove the key, lower and
push the trunk lid down.
SPA1820 SPA1822
TRUNK LID
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
CANCELLING THE POWER TO THE
TRUNK LID
When the switch located inside the glove
box is OFF jA , the power to the trunk lid
will be cancelled and the trunk lid cannot
be opened by the trunk lid release switch
or the trunk lid opener button on the electronic ignition key. It can be opened only
with the emergency key or wallet key.
To connect the power to the trunk lid,
push the switch to ON jB position.
AUTO CLOSURE
If the trunk lid is pulled down to a partly
open position, the lid will pull itself to the
closed position.
Do not apply excessive force when the
auto closure is operating. Excessive force
applied may cause the mechanism to
malfunction.
CAUTION
O The lid will automatically close from a
partly open position. To avoid pinching,
keep hands and fingers away from
trunk opening.
O Do not let children operate the trunk
lid.
AUTO OPEN & CLOSE TRUNK LID
CAUTION
O Make sure there is no one around the
trunk before operation. Be careful not
to pinch your fingers, arms or neck as
the trunk will open or close automatically.
O A buzzer will sound during operation,
stand away from the trunk lid.
O Do not leave the vehicle before the
trunk lid closes completely.
O Do not overload the trunk. Otherwise,
when the trunk lid is closed automatically, the lid or load could be damaged
or deformed.
O The automatic function may not operate
if the wind is strong, or when the trunk
lid is covered by snow or frozen.
O If a heavy accessory is attached to the
trunk lid, the automatic function may
not operate.
O Do not operate the automatic function
when leaning against the trunk lid or
with a load on the trunk lid.
O Do not operate the automatic function
in a car wash.
SPA1821
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O If opening and closing operations are
performed continuously, a protection
circuit may operate to cancel operations.
O If the engine is started during automatic operation, an erroneous operation may occur.
O The automatic trunk opening and closing mechanism will not operate under
the following conditions:
O when the selector lever is in a position other than P
O when the vehicle speed is above 7
km/h (11 MPH)
O The automatic operation will be canceled if the following is performed
during automatic trunk opening or
closing operation.
O when the trunk opener is pulled
O when the trunk switch on the electronic key is pushed for more than
0.5 seconds
O when the closing switch is pushed
O when the selector lever is shifted to
a position other than P
O when the vehicle speed is above 7
km/h (11 MPH)
O when trunk lid closing operation is
stopped by hand before the auto
closure mechanism operates
How to open automatically with
the trunk opener
j1 Pull the trunk opener switch jA located on the lower portion of the driver’s door armrest to unlock the trunk
lid.
j2 Pull the trunk opener switch for about
1 second until a beep sound is heard.
The trunk will open automatically all
the way.
When the anti-theft alarm is set, it is not
possible to unlock the trunk with the
trunk opener.
SPA1820
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Refer to how to cancel the trunk opener.
How to open automatically with
the trunk button on the electronic
ignition key
j1 Approach to the trunk and push the
trunk button jA on the electronic ignition key for about 0.5 seconds. The
trunk will be unlocked.
j2 After unlocking the trunk, push the
trunk button on the electronic ignition
key for about 0.5 seconds. The trunk
will open automatically all the way.
How to automatically close the
trunk lid
Push and hold the close switch jA on the
trunk lid for about 1 second until a beep
sound is heard. The trunk lid will close
automatically all the way.
Opening without using automatic
operation
If you do not want to use the automatic
function (such as in the rain), the trunk
will only be unlocked by the following operations:
SPA1837 SPA1838
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O when the trunk lid opener switch jA is
pulled for less than 1 second
O when the trunk button jB on the electronic ignition key is pushed only once
EMERGENCY TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from playing
and becoming locked in the trunk where
they could be seriously injured. Keep the
car locked, with the trunk lid securely
latched, when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.
The emergency trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become
locked inside the trunk.
To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull
the release handle jA until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The
release lever is made of a material that
glows in the dark after a brief exposure to
ambient light.
The handle is located on the back of the
trunk lid as illustrated.
SPA1824
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
OPENER OPERATION
To open the fuel filler lid, push the opener
switch jA . To lock, close the fuel filler lid
securely.
FUEL FILLER CAP
WARNING
O Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop engine and do not smoke
or allow open flames or sparks near the
vehicle when refueling.
O Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the
cap a third of a turn, and wait for any
“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel
from spraying out and possibly causing
personal injury. Then remove the cap.
O Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
O Use only an original equipment type
fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and
emission control system. An incorrect
cap can result in a serious malfunction
and possible injury. It could also cause
the malfunction indicator lamp to come
on.
O Never pour fuel into the throttle body
to attempt to start your vehicle.
O Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
• Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
• Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
• Keep the pump nozzle in contact with
the container while you are filling it.
• Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.
SPA1825
FUEL FILLER LID
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
CAUTION
O If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
O Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks.
Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap properly may cause the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to illuminate. If the
lamp illuminates because the fuel
filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or
install the cap and continue to drive the
vehicle. The lamp should turn off
after a few driving trips. If the
lamp does not turn off after a few
driving trips, have the vehicle inspected
by an INFINITI dealer.
The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn
the cap counterclockwise jA to remove. To
tighten, turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard.
Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder jB
while refueling.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
SPA1773A
TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 04.4.29/F50-D X
TILT OR TELESCOPIC OPERATION
Move the lever to adjust the steering
wheel up or down, forward or rearward to
the desired position.
Move up operation
The automatic drive positioner system will
make the steering wheel move up
automatically when the key is removed
from the ignition switch. This lets the
driver get into and out of the seat more
easily. The steering wheel moves back
into position when the key is inserted into
the ignition switch.
For more information, see “Automatic
drive positioner” later in this section.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for
proper steering operation and comfort.
The driver’s air bag inflates with great
force. If you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
air bag if you are up against it when it
inflates. Always sit back against the
seatback and as far away as practical
from the steering wheel. Always use the
seat belts.
USING THE SUN VISORS
CAUTION
O Store the main sun visor after storing
the sub-sun visor and the extension
sun visor.
O Do not pull the sub-sun visor and the
extension sun visor forcefully downward.
j1 To block out glare from the front,
swing down the main sun visor.
j2 To block glare from the side, remove
the main sun visor from the center
mount and swing it to the side.
j3 Then, to block glare from the front too,
swing down the sub-sun visor.
j4 Slide the extension sun visor if necessary.
SPA1826
SUN VISORS
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE
MIRROR AND OUTSIDE MIRROR
(DRIVER’S SIDE ONLY)
The inside mirror and driver’s side outside
mirror are designed so that they automatically change reflection according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you.
When the inside mirror AUTO switch jA is
pushed, the indicator light jB will illuminate and excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. Push the switch once again to make
the inside mirror and outside mirror operate normally and the indicator light will
go off.
Do not hang any object on the mirror or apply glass cleaner. Doing so will reduce the
sensitivity of the sensor jC , resulting in
improper operation.
SPA1827
SPA1828
MIRRORS
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 05.2.25/F50-D X
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
Adjusting outside mirrors
The outside mirror will operate only when
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Turn the switch to the L or R side to select
the left or right side mirror, then adjust
using the control button.
These mirrors will be heated when the
rear window defogger switch is operated.
WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the
passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right.
Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over
your shoulder to properly judge distances
to other objects.
Foldable outside mirrors
Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the rear of the vehicle.
Automatic mirror angle
positioning when backing up
When the following conditions are met,
the selected mirror surface will turn
downward to provide better rear visibility
close to the vehicle.
1. The ignition switch is ON.
2. The outside mirror control switch is
turned to L or R.
SPA1803 SPA1829
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
3. The shift lever is moved to R (Reverse).
After the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse), the mirror surface selected in step
2 will turn downward.
The selected mirror surface will return to
its original position when any of the following have occurred:
O The shift lever is moved to any position other than R (Reverse).
O The outside mirror control switch is
set to the N (Neutral) position.
O The ignition switch is turned OFF.
For more information regarding this feature and how to save the R (Reverse) mirror tilt-down adjustment in the “Automatic
drive positioner” memory, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” later in this section.
The automatic drive positioner system
has two features:
O Memory storage
O Entry/exit function
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
Two positions for the driver’s seat,
steering column, and outside mirrors can
be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures
to use the memory system.
1. Set the shift selector lever to the P
(Park) position.
2. Turn the ignition ON.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering
column and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating
each adjusting switch. For additional
SPA1584
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
information, see “Seats” in the “1.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section and
“Steering wheel” and “Outside mirrors” earlier in this section.
During this step, do not turn the ignition to any positions other than ON.
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2)
fully for at least 1 second.
The indicator light for the pushed
memory switch will come on and stay
on for approximately 5 seconds after
pushing the switch. After the indicator
light goes off, the selected positions
are stored in the selected memory (1
or 2).
If memory is stored in the same
memory switch, the previous memory
will be deleted.
Procedure for storing the outside
mirror positions for best visibility
when backing up
Two outside mirror positions for backing
up can be stored in the automatic drive
positioner memory.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition ON. (Do not start the
engine.)
3. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully
for at least 1 second to operate the
automatic drive positioner.
4. Turn the outside mirror control switch
to L (left).
5. Depress the brake pedal.
6. Move the automatic transmission shift
lever to R (Reverse).
7. Adjust the mirror to the desired
viewing position for backing up by operating the outside mirror control
switch.
8. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch 1 or 2
selected in step 3 fully for at least 1
second.
O The indicator light for the pushed
memory switch will come on and stay
on for approximately 5 seconds after
pushing the switch. After the indicator
light goes off, the selected mirror position is stored in the selected
memory (1 or 2).
9. Turn the outside mirror control switch
to R (right).
Repeat the above procedure to adjust
the right mirror position and store in
the selected memory.
O When the driver’s seat, outside mirror
and steering column are not in the
memorized position, the outside
mirror will move with the initial tiltdown angle, if the reverse tilt-down
position is stored.
Linking an electronic key to a
stored memory position
An electronic key can be linked to a
stored memory position with the following
procedure.
1. Follow the steps for storing a memory
position.
2. While the indicator light for the
memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 seconds (at step 4 of storing the automatic drive positioner
memory), push the “UNLOCK” button
on the electronic key. The indicator
light will blink. After the indicator light
goes off, the electronic key is linked to
that memory setting.
With the key removed from the ignition
switch, push the “UNLOCK” button on the
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
electronic key. The driver’s seat, steering
column and outside mirrors will move to
the memorized position.
Confirming memory storage
O Turn the ignition ON and push the SET
switch. If the main memory has not
been stored, the indicator light will
come on for approximately 0.5 seconds. When the memory has stored
the position, the indicator light will
stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
O If the battery cable is disconnected, or
if the fuse opens, the memory will be
canceled. In such a case, reset the desired positions using the following
procedures.
1. Open and close the driver’s door more
than two times with the ignition key in
the LOCK position.
2. Reset the desired position using the
previous procedure.
Selecting the memorized position
1. Set the shift selector lever to the P
(Park) position.
2. Turn the ignition ON.
3. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully
for at least 1 second.
The driver’s seat, steering column and
outside mirrors will move to the
memorized position with the indicator
light flashing, and then the light will
stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
This system is designed so that the driver’s seat, steering column and outside
mirror will automatically move when the
automatic transmission selector lever is in
the P (Park) position. This allows the
driver to get into and out of the driver’s
seat more easily.
The driver’s seat will slide backward and
the steering wheel will move up:
O When the key is removed from the ignition switch.
O When the driver’s door is opened with
the key turned to LOCK.
O When the key is turned from ACC to
LOCK with the driver’s door open while
the automatic transmission selector
lever is in the P (Park) position.
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will
return to the previous position:
O When the key is inserted into the ignition switch.
O When the driver’s door is closed with
the key turned to LOCK.
O When the key is turned from ACC to
ON while the automatic transmission
selector lever is in the P (Park) position.
The entry/exit feature can be adjusted or
canceled. See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the “Display screen, heater, air
conditioner and audio systems” section of
this manual.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The automatic drive positioner system will
not work or will stop operating under the
following conditions:
O when the vehicle speed is above 4
MPH (7 km/h).
O when any two of the memory switches
are simultaneously pushed while the
automatic drive positioner is operating.
O when the adjusting switch for the driver’s seat is moved while the automatic
drive positioner is operating.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O when the memory switch (1 or 2) is
not pushed for at least 1 second.
O when the seat has been already
moved to the memorized position.
O when no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
The automatic drive positioner system can
be canceled. See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio
and voice-activated control systems” section of this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
4 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated
control systems
Safety note....................................................... 4-2
Control panel button functions ......................... 4-2
Names of the components .......................... 4-3
How to use joystick and “ENTER” button .... 4-3
How to use “PREV” button .......................... 4-3
Start-up screen (model with Navigation
system) ....................................................... 4-4
How to use the “SETTING” button.................... 4-4
Rear view monitor setting ........................... 4-5
“AUDIO” settings........................................ 4-5
“DISPLAY” settings..................................... 4-6
Vehicle electronic systems .......................... 4-7
Rain-sensing auto wiper.............................. 4-9
Language/unit (For model without Navigation
system) ....................................................... 4-9
Rear view monitor .......................................... 4-10
How to read the displayed lines................ 4-10
Adjusting the screen ................................. 4-11
Operating tips........................................... 4-11
Ventilators...................................................... 4-12
Automatic climate control............................... 4-13
Automatic operation.................................. 4-14
Manual operation...................................... 4-15
Ambient temperature ................................ 4-16
Rear control button (if so equipped) ......... 4-17
Operating tips........................................... 4-17
In-cabin microfilter ................................... 4-17
Servicing climate control ................................ 4-18
Audio system ................................................. 4-18
Radio ........................................................ 4-18
FM radio reception .................................... 4-19
AM radio reception ................................... 4-19
Satellite radio reception............................ 4-19
Audio operation precautions ..................... 4-19
FM-AM radio with cassette player and
compact disc (CD) changer........................ 4-22
CD care and cleaning ................................ 4-32
Steering wheel switch for audio control .... 4-33
Audio rear control switch
(if so equipped) ........................................ 4-34
Antenna .................................................... 4-35
Car phone or CB radio.................................... 4-35
Vehicle information ........................................ 4-36
Vehicle information display....................... 4-36
Trip computer information......................... 4-37
Fuel economy information ......................... 4-37
Maintenance information .......................... 4-38
Maintenance notice................................... 4-39
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Tire pressure information .......................... 4-39
Warning display ............................................. 4-40
Voice-activated control system (VACS)............ 4-41
Features.................................................... 4-41
Using the system ...................................... 4-41
Personal vocabulary .................................. 4-42
How to say numbers ................................. 4-43
Voice command descriptions..................... 4-43
Speaker adaptation (SA) mode.................. 4-47
Troubleshooting guide .............................. 4-49
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
WARNING
O Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving, in order that full attention may be given to
driving operation.
O Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electric shock.
O Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued use
of the system may result in accident,
fire or electric shock.
O In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest INFINITI
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
SAA0847
SAFETY NOTE CONTROL PANEL BUTTON FUNCTIONS
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
When you use this system, make sure the
engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine
not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a
long time, it will use up all the battery
power, and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“ENTER” button
This is a button on the control panel.
“Display” key
This is a select key on the screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the
next function.
NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS
1. “ ” front defogger button; refer to
page 4-15.
2. Air recirculation “ ”, fresh
“ ” button; refer to page 4-15.
3. “ ” rear window defogger button;
refer to the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
4. “SETTING” button for audio, display
and Vehicle Electronic Systems; refer
to page 4-5.
5. A/C and audio control button “ ”
to “ ”; refer to page 4-13 and
4-22.
6. “MAP” button (Navigation system
equipped vehicles only); refer to the
separate Navigation (NAVI) system
Owner’s Manual.
7. “INFO” vehicle information button; refer to page 4-36.
8. “PTYzCAT” program type/category button; refer to page 4-25.
9. “TAPE” play button; refer to page
4-26.
10.“FMzAM” AM, FM1 and FM2 band select button; refer to page 4-23.
11.“SAT” satellite band select button; refer to page 4-24.
12.“CD” play button; refer to page 4-26.
13.“OFF” button for climate control
system.
14.Temperature control knob (driver only
or driver and passenger); refer to page
4-13.
15.“AUTO” automatic climate control ON
button; refer to page 4-13.
16.“PREV” previous button; refer to the
right column.
17. JOYSTICK and “ENTER” push button;
refer to the right column.
18.Volume control knob for audio
19.“AUDIO” ON button; refer to page
4-23.
20.“OFF” button for audio
21.“AUTO PASS” automatic climate control ON button (passenger side); refer
to page 4-14.
22.Temperature control knob (passenger
side); refer to page 4-14.
HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND
“ENTER” BUTTON
Choose an item on the display using the
joystick and push the “ENTER” button for
operation.
HOW TO USE “PREV” BUTTON
This has two functions.
O Go back to the previous display (cancel).
If you touch “PREV” button during setup,
the setup will be canceled and/or the disMonitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-3
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
play will return to the previous screen.
O Finish setup.
If you touch this button after the setup is
completed, the setup will start over, and
the display will return to the climate control, Audio mode or Navigation (if so
equipped) screen.
If you want to return to the climate control mode screen, push the “AUTO”
button. To return to the audio mode, push
the “Audio” button.
START-UP SCREEN (model with
Navigation system)
When you turn the ignition key to ACC,
the SYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on the screen. When you read and
agree with the warning, push the “ENTER”
button.
If you do not push the “ENTER” button,
this system will not proceed to the next
step display.
To proceed to the NAVI system, refer to
the separate Navigation system Owner’s
Manual.
To set Audio (Bass, Treble, Balance, Fader
and Button Tone/Beep Response), Display
(Brightness/Contrast, Display Off, Settings Display Duration and Audio & Climate Control Dual Display), Vehicle Electronic systems and Navigation system (if
so equipped), push the “SETTING”
button.
The following display will appear when
the “SETTING” button is pushed.
* Please refer to the separate Navigation
system Owner’s Manual.
SAA0848
Model with Navigation system
HOW TO USE THE “SETTING” BUTTON
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
REAR VIEW MONITOR SETTING
WARNING
Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tint
and Color of the rear view monitor while
the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied and the engine
is not running.
To adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tint
and Color of the rear view monitor, push
the “SETTING” button with the rear view
monitor on, select the item key and adjust
the level using the joystick. “AUDIO” SETTINGS
The following display will appear after
pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting
the “Audio” key with the joystick and
pushing the “ENTER” button.
To adjust it by the speaker tone quality
and sound (balance and fader), select the
“Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance” or “Fader”
key and adjust it by using the joystick.
When the “Button Tone/Beep Response”
indicator turns green, the beep will
sound. (When you first receive the vehicle, the beep will be set to off.)
SAA0572
Model without Navigation system
SAA0849
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-5
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
To stop the beep, select the “Button
Tone/Beep Response” key using the joystick and push the “ENTER” button. The
indicator of the “Button Tone/Beep Response” key will turn off.
To maintain the sound quality and speech
intelligibility, select the “Noise Compensation” key and push the “ENTER” button.
The indicator light of the “Noise Compensation” key will turn green.
To return to the SETTING screen, push the
“PREV” button or “SETTING” button.
“DISPLAY” SETTINGS
The following display will appear when
pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting
“Display” key and pushing the “ENTER”
button.
Brightness/Contrast (Map
Background (model with
Navigation system))
To adjust the brightness and contrast of
the screen, select the “Brightness/
Contrast” key and push the “ENTER” button. Then you can adjust the brightness
to Darker or Brighter, and the contrast to
Lower or Higher using the joystick.
O You can have two different brightness
settings for the display. One setting is
for when the headlights are on and
the other setting is for when the headlights are off.
The “Map Background” is for models with
navigation system. Please refer to the
separate navigation system Owner’s
Manual.
Display Off
To turn off the screen, push the “SETTING” button and select the “Display”
key and “Display Off” key. The indicator
of the
“Display Off” will turn on to green. When
any mode button is pushed with the
screen off, the screen turns on for further
operation. The screen will turn off automatically 5 seconds after the operation is
finished on the Audio & Climate Control
Dual Display, SETTING or VEHICLE INFO.
the map display (Navigation system only)
modes.
To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING” button and select the “Display”
key and “Display Off” key, then set the
screen to ON by pushing the “ENTER”
button.
Settings Display Duration
When the “Display Settings” adjustments
SAA0861
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
are completed, the display automatically
returns to either the audio or air conditioning control screen, whichever was displayed last. You can set the length of time
that the “Display Settings” screen will be
shown after no additional adjustments
are made.
To set the display duration, select the
“settings display duration” key and move
the joystick to the left (shorter duration)
or right (longer duration).
To set the display duration, select the current time setting with the joystick and
push the “ENTER” button.
Audio & Climate Control Dual
Display
Select the “Audio & Climate Control Dual
Display” key and push the “ENTER”
button. The audio and climate control setting condition will appear on the screen.
To return to the setting screen, push the
“SETTING” button.
VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
The following display will appear when
selecting the “Vehicle Electronic Systems” key with the joystick and pushing
the “ENTER” button while the engine is
running.
You can set the various electronic systems operating conditions.
SAA0851
*Model with Navigation system
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-7
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
To set an operating condition, select the
applicable item using the joystick, and
push the “ENTER” button.
The indicator light alternately turns on
and off each time the “ENTER” button is
pushed.
Indicator light is illuminated. — ON
Indicator light is not illuminated. — OFF
Lift steering column when exiting
vehicle
The steering column automatically tilts up
and returns to the original position for
ease of entry and exit.
Adjust driver seat when exiting
vehicle
The driver’s seat automatically moves
back and returns to the original position
for ease of exit and entry.
Illuminate interior when unlocking
vehicle
The interior light automatically turns on
when the door is unlocked using the UNLOCK button on the electronic ignition key
or the key.
Interior lights off delay
You can set the time (15 sec. to 45 sec.)
or turn off the interior light timer.
Select the “Interior Lights Off Delay” key,
then move the joystick to the left or right
to adjust the timer.
Sensitivity of automatic
headlights
Automatic light illumination can be set as
desired.
Select the “Sensitivity of Automatic Headlights” key, then move the joystick to the
left (lower) or right (higher).
SAA0852 SAA0853
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Automatic headlights off delay
You can control how long it takes the automatic timer to turn off the headlights or
turn off the timer in the AUTO position after you turn the key to OFF and close all
doors.
Select the “Automatic Headlights Off
Delay” key, then move the joystick to the
left or right to adjust the timer.
Keyless remote response — horn/
lights
When this key is set to Hazard indicators
and horn, or Hazard indicators only, the
following conditions will be set.
MODE Lock Unlock
Hazard indicators only
Hazard —
twice
No operation
Hazard indicators and
horn
Hazard —
twice
Horn — once
Hazard —
once
Remote custom settings
If you unlock a door with the same electronic ignition key used when locking with
the “Remote Custom Settings” key on,
the audio settings you made last time remain the same. As many as four electronic ignition keys can be used with one
vehicle.
RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPERS
When this key is turned on using the “ENTER” button, the Rain-sensing auto wiper
is ready to be set as your preference. For
more details, see “Windshield wiper and
washer switch” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section.
Return all settings to default
When this key is turned on using the
“ENTER” button, all settings made by VEHICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the
original factory - set conditions. LANGUAGE/UNIT
(For model without Navigation
system)
The following display will appear when
selecting the “Language/Unit” key and
pushing the “ENTER” button.
Language: English or French
Unit: US — Mile, °F, MPG
Metric — km, °C, /100 km
You can select the language and unit
using the joystick and “ENTER” button.
SAA0506
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-9
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
When the selector lever is shifted into the
R (Reverse) position, the monitor display
shows view to the rear of the vehicle.
The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary objects
to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The
system will not detect small objects
below the bumper and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the
ground.
WARNING
O The rear view camera is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper
backing up. Always turn and check that
it is safe to do so before backing up.
Always back up slowly.
O Objects viewed in the rear view monitor
differ from actual distance because a
wide-angle lens is used. Objects in the
rear view monitor will appear visually
opposite than when viewed in the rear
view and outside mirrors.
O Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.
O Do not put anything on the rear view
camera. The rear view camera is installed above the license plate.
O When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
O Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a
fire or an electric shock.
CAUTION
There is a plastic cover over the camera. Do
not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or
snow from the cover.
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance
and distances to objects with reference to
the bumper line jA are displayed on the
monitor.
They are indicated as reference distances
to objects. Displayed lines indicate distances 1.5 feet (red) j1 , 3 feet (yellow)
j2 , 7 feet (green) j3 and 10 feet (green)
j4 [0.5 m (red), 1 m (yellow), 2 m (green)
and 3 m (green)] from the lower part of
the bumper line jA .
SAA0889
REAR VIEW MONITOR
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
The vehicle clearance lines are wider than
the actual clearance.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
To adjust the quality of the screen, refer to
HOW TO USE THE “SETTING” BUTTON in
this section.
Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tint
and Color of the rear view monitor while the
vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly applied and the engine is
not running.
OPERATING TIPS
O When the selector lever is shifted to R,
the monitor screen automatically
changes to the rear view monitor mode.
However, the radio can be heard.
O It may take some time until the rear
view monitor is displayed after the selector lever has been shifted to R. Objects may be distorted momentarily
until the rear view monitor screen is
displayed completely. When the selector lever is returned to a position
other than R, it may take some time until the screen changes. Objects on the
screen may be distorted until they are
completely displayed.
O When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not clearly
display objects. This is not a malfunction.
O When strong light directly enters the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
O Vertical lines may be seen in objects on
the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper. This is
not a malfunction.
O The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction.
O The colors of objects on the rear view
monitor may differ somewhat from
those of the actual object.
O When the contrast of objects is low at
night, pushing the “ENTER” button may
not change the brightness.
O Objects on the monitor may not be clear
in a dark place or at night.
O If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the
camera, the rear view monitor may not
clearly display objects. Clean the
camera.
O Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. To clean the camera, wipe
with a cloth dampened with diluted
mild cleaning agent and then wipe with
a dry cloth.
O Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
O Do not use body wax on the camera
window. Wipe off any wax with a clean
cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with water.
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-11
Z 04.11.30/F50-D X
1. Front ventilator
2. Rear ventilator (located on the back of
the center console)
Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction of ventilators.
: This symbol indicates that the
vents are closed.
: This symbol indicates that the
vents are open.
SAA0864 SAA0865
VENTILATORS
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. “ ” Front defroster button
2. Intake air control “ ”
button
3. Air conditioner control “ ”
(“DRIVER” key), “ ” (“DUAL” key)
buttons
4. A/C control “ ” (“ ” fan
speed up), “ ” (“ ” fan
speed down)
5. A/C control “ ” (“PASS” key),
“ ” (“ECON” key) buttons
6. “OFF” button for climate control
system
7. Temperature control knob (driver only,
or driver and passenger)
8. “AUTO” climate control ON button
9. “AUTO PASS” ON button (passenger
side)
10.Temperature control knob (passenger
side)
SAA0856
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-13
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Start the engine and operate the controls
to activate the air conditioner (A/C).
WARNING
O The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
O Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support of
others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should not be left alone either. On hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
O Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
O Positioning of the heater and/or air
conditioner controls should not be done
while driving, so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
When the “AUTO” button or “AUTO PASS”
button is pushed, the “AUTO CLIMATE
CONTROL” screen will appear.
You can individually set driver and front
passenger side temperature and air flow
using each temperature control knob and
A/C control buttons “ ” to “ ”.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified
heating (AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round.
The system works automatically to
maintain a constant temperature. Air flow
distribution and fan speed are also
controlled automatically.
1. Push the “AUTO” or “AUTO PASS”
button on. (AUTO will appear on the
display.)
2. Turn the temperature control knob to
set the desired temperature.
For normal operation, adjust the temperature control knob to about 75°F
(24°C).
3. When selecting the “DUAL” key by
pushing A/C control button “ ” or
when the passenger side temperature
control knob is turned, the “DUAL”
key indicator will turn on (green) and
the temperature and air flow can be
controlled individually from the driver
and front passenger sides.
4. To turn off the climate control system,
push the “OFF” button.
Economical operation (ECON)
Economical operation reduces some load
to the engine to improve the fuel
economy. It allows higher humidity than
normal operation.
Pushing the “ECON” key using A/C control
button “ ” changes operations as
follows.
SAA0576
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
A/C → ECON → ECON off (A/C off) →
ECON
Operations will appear on the upper right
side on the display.
Push the AUTO button to turn on the automatic operation.
Heating (A/C off)
Use this mode when you need to heat
only.
1. Push the “ECON” key using A/C control button “ ” twice (ECON indicator will turn off on the screen.).
2. Turn the temperature control knob to
set the desired temperature.
O The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
O Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Otherwise
the system may not work properly.
O If the windows fog up, do not use the
Heating mode.
3. To return to the air conditioner AUTO
(A/C) mode, push the “AUTO” climate
control on button. (AUTO will be displayed on the screen.)
Dehumidified defogging
1. Push the front defogger “ ”
button on. (The indicator light on the
switch will illuminate.)
2. Turn the temperature control knob to
set the desired temperature.
O To quickly remove ice from the outside
of the windows, set the A/C fan speed
at its maximum by pushing the A/C
control button “ ” and the A/C
temperature at the highest by using
the temperature control knob.
O As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the “ ”
button to return to AUTO mode.
O When the front defogger “ ”
button is pushed, the air conditioner
will automatically be turned on at
outside temperatures above 23°F
(−5°C) to defrost the windshield. The
air recirculation mode“ ” will
automatically be turned off.
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment to improve defogging performance.
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Push the A/C control button “ ” or
“ ” to change the fan speed manually.
Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.
Automatic intake air control
Push the intake air control button “
” for automatic air intake control
(Fresh, FRE/REC and Recirculation). The
indicator light on the “ side will
come on.
Air recirculation
Push the intake air control button “
” to recirculate interior air inside the
vehicle. The indicator light on the
“ ” side will come on.
Fresh air
Push the button “ ” to draw
outside air into the passenger compartment. The indicator light on the button will come on.
The air recirculation “ ” cannot be
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-15
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
activated when the air conditioner is in the
front defrosting mode “ ”.
Air flow control
Pushing the A/C control button
“ ” (Select the “ ” key —
driver side) or “ ” (Select the
“ ” key — passenger side) selects
the air outlet to provide:
: Air flow from front center, side and
rear ventilators.
: Air flow from front center, side and
rear ventilators, and front and rear
foot outlets.
: Air flow mainly from front and rear
foot outlets.
: Air flow from defroster and front
and rear foot outlets.
To turn system off
Push the OFF button.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
The ambient temperature will be displayed.
The ambient temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator. The sensor
may be affected by road or engine heat,
wind direction and other driving conditions. The display may differ from the actual ambient temperature or the temperature displayed on various signs or billboards.
1. Auto button
2. Air flow selecting button
3. Fan speed control button
4. Temperature control button
SAA0866
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
REAR CONTROL BUTTON (if so
equipped)
You can adjust the climate control system
for rear seat passenger using the following
climate control button items in the rear
seat.
“AUTO” button: automatic climate control
mode on
“ ” button: Fan speed control up (Max
fan speed → return to Low fan speed)
“ ” button: Air flow selecting (center
console)
“ ” button: Temperature control
up/down
OPERATING TIPS
When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air
flow from the foot outlets may not operate
for 20 to 150 seconds. This is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature
warms up, air flow from the foot outlets will
operate normally.
The sensor jA on the instrument panel
helps maintain a constant temperature. Do
not put anything on or around this sensor.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The climate control system is equipped
with an in-cabin microfilter which collects
dirt, pollen, dust, etc. and it is also
equipped with a deodorant filter to reduce
odor. To make sure the air conditioner
heats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the filter in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in the INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide. To replace
the filter, contact your INFINITI dealer.
The filter should be replaced if air flow is
extremely decreased or when windows fog
up easily during operating heater or air
conditioning system.
SIC2768
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-17
Z 05.2.25/F50-D X
The climate control system in your
INFINITI is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This
refrigerant will not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. However, special charging
equipment and lubricant are required
when servicing your INFINITI air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your
climate control system. See “Capacities
and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the
“9. Technical and consumer information”
for climate control system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations.
Your INFINITI dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly climate
control system.
WARNING
The system contains refrigerant under high
pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air
conditioner service should be done only by
an experienced technician with the proper
equipment.
RADIO
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and
push the “AUDIO” on button to turn on
the radio. If you listen to the radio with
the engine not running, the key should be
turned to the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and
other external influences. Intermittent
changes in reception quality normally are
caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception
quality.
Radio reception
Your INFINITI radio system is equipped
with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to
enhance radio reception. These circuits
are designed to extend reception range,
and to enhance the quality of that reception.
However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals
that can affect radio reception quality in a
moving vehicle, even when the finest
equipment is used. These characteristics
are completely normal in a given reception area, and do not indicate any malfunction in your INFINITI radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly
change because of vehicle movement.
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work
against ideal reception. Described below
are some of the factors that can affect
your radio reception.
SERVICING CLIMATE CONTROL AUDIO SYSTEM
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25
to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural
(single channel) FM having slightly more
range than stereo FM. External influences
may sometimes interfere with FM station
reception even if the FM station is within
25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM
signal is directly related to the distance
between the transmitter and receiver. FM
signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as
light. For example they will reflect off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves
away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to
antenna position, usually in conjunction
with increased distance from the station
transmitter, static or flutter can be heard.
This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control counterclockwise to reduce
treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may
cancel each other, resulting in momentary
flutter or loss of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and
skip along the ground. In addition, the
signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because
of these characteristics. AM signals are
also subject to interference as they travel
from transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is
passing through freeway underpasses or
in areas with many tall buildings. It can
also occur for several seconds during
ionospheric turbulence even in areas
where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even
traffic lights.
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION
When the satellite radio (if so equipped)
is first installed or the battery has been
replaced, the satellite radio may not work
properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait
more than 10 minutes with satellite radio
ON for satellite radio to receive all of the
necessary data.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Cassette player
O To maintain good quality sound,
INFINITI recommends using cassette
tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in
length.
O Cassette tapes should be removed
from the player when not in use. Store
cassettes in their protective cases and
away from direct sunlight, heat, dust,
moisture and magnetic sources.
SAA0306
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-19
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O Direct sunlight can cause the cassette
to become deformed. The use of deformed cassettes may cause the cassette to jam in the player.
O Do not use cassettes with labels
which are peeling and loose. If used,
the label could jam in the player.
O If a cassette has loose tape, insert a
pencil through one of the cassette
hubs and rewind the tape firmly
around the hubs. Loose tape may
cause tape jamming and wavering
sound quality.
O Over a period of time, the playback
head, capstan and pinch roller may
collect a tape coating residue as the
tape is played. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering
sound, and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If
the residue is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning.
Compact Disc (CD) player
O During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
O The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
O The CD player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compartment
temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use.
O Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12
cm) round discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on
the disc or packaging.
O Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
O CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,
scratched, covered with fingerprints,
or that have pin holes may not work
properly.
O The following CDs may not work properly:
• Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
• Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
• Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
O Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction.
• 8 cm (3.1 in) discs with an adapter
SAA0480
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
• CDs that are not round
• CDs with a paper label
• CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-21
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
FM-AM RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER AND COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER
1. Audio control buttons “ ”,
“ ”
2. Audio control buttons “ ”,
“ ”
3. Audio control buttons “ ”,
“ ”
4. “PTYzCAT” program type and category
select button
5. “TAPE” tape play button
6. “FMzAM” FM1, FM2, AM band select
button
7. “SAT” satellite channel select button
8. “CD” compact disc play button
9. “PREV” previous button
10.JOYSTICK and “ENTER” push button
11.Volume control knob
12.“AUDIO” on button
13.“OFF” audio off buttonSAA0850
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Audio main operation
Head unit
The radio has an FM diversity reception
system, which employs two antennas
printed on the rear window. This system
automatically switches to the antenna
which is receiving less interference.
The tape deck employs a permalloy head
which allows for improved reproduction of
high frequency ranges. Noise is also
greatly reduced by the use of the Dolby B
NR (Noise Reduction) system. The auto
loudness circuit enhances the low frequency range automatically in both radio
reception and tape and CD playback.
ONzOFF/Volume control:
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and
then push the “AUDIO” on button while
the system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off.
While the system is on, pushing the “OFF”
button turns the system off.
Turn the volume control knob to adjust
the volume.
Adjusting tone quality and speaker
balance:
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and
Fader, refer to “How to use the SETTING
button” earlier in this section.
Audio display
“FM AM” button:
When the “FM AM” button is pushed, the
following display will appear on the
screen, and play FM1/FM2 or AM.
When the radio text message ‘Push “ENTER” to Display Station Msg.’ is shown at
the bottom of the audio display, radio
station related new information will be
updated and displayed if the “ENTER”
button is pushed and held.
SAA0578
FM
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-23
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
“ ” — Use the joystick
Up or down: Tuning ! or @
Right or left (for less than 1.5 seconds):
Seek ! or @ to the next available station.
Right or left (for more than 1.5 seconds):
Scan ! or @ to the next available station.
“ ” to “ ” Memory stations
To program a station to memory (radio
preset), tune the radio to the station you
want to “memorize”. Push down and hold
the desired audio control button (1 - 6). A
beep sound will be heard if it is set. The
station is now “memorized” to that audio
control button.
“SAT” satellite radio button (if the unit
is so equipped):
No satellite radio reception is available
and “NO SAT” will be displayed when the
SAT button is pushed unless the optional
satellite receiver and antenna were purchased and installed and an XM or SIRIUSTM satellite radio service subscription
is active. Satellite radio option can only
be installed in vehicles that were factory
pre-wired for satellite radio.
The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio
inc. SIRIUS and related marks are tradeSAA0510
AM
SAA0613
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
marks of Sirius Satellite Radio Inc. All
rights are reserved.
When the “SAT” button is pushed, the
satellite radio SAT1 or SAT2 mode will appear on the screen and then play satellite
radio. SAT 1 presets 1-6 and SAT 2 presets 1-6 are also available.
“ ” — Use the joystick to select satellite radio channel
Right or left: Select the desired satellite
radio channel. Holding it will continue the
channel change.
Up or down: Change the satellite radio
category. (for example: ROCK, JAZZ, NEWS
...)
“PTYzCAT” — In SAT mode, use to change
the preset mode to category presets. To
scroll channels within a preset category,
push the preset button.
“PTYzCAT” program type and category
select button:
When the “PTYzCAT” button is pushed
during FM mode, the PROGRAM TYPE
screen will appear.
When the “PTYzCAT” button is pushed
during the satellite radio mode, the CATEGORY screen will appear. Pushing the
“PTYzCAT” button repeated will change
the category (upside only).
The PTY name can be selected as follows
and the radio goes into the PTY interruption standby mode and the PTY name or
frequency is displayed.
“ ” — Use the joystick to select PTY
station or category:
Up or down: Select the PTY name or category.
Right or left: Seek the desired PTY station.
“PTY” station names
“ ” to “ ”: memory PTY stations
To add PTY stations to memory, hold the
desired audio control button (1 - 6) (until
a beep sound is heard).
SAA0579
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-25
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
“TAPE” button:
If a tape is inserted into the tape player,
the TAPE screen will appear and the tape
will play.
For the tape insertion procedure, see
“Cassette tape player operation” later in
this section.
Audio control button
“ ”, “ ”— “FF” (fast forward),
“REW” (rewind)
button
“ ”, “ ”— “APS FF” (automatic
program search (APS)
FF), “APS REW” (APS
REW) button
“ ”— “ ” program button
“ ”— “ ” Dolby B NR (Noise Reduction) button
“CD” button:
When the “CD” button is pushed, the CD
CHANGER screen will appear and, if a CD
is inserted into the CD changer, the CD
will play.
For the CD insertion procedure, see “Compact disc (CD) changer operation” later in
this section.
“ ”, “ ”— “ ” (CD disc up),
“ ” (CD disc
down) button
SAA0511 SAA0614
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
“ ”, “ ”— Push the “ ” or
“ ” button for
less 1.5 seconds.
“ ” truck up,
“ ” truck down
button
“ ”, “ ”— Push the “ ” or
“ ” button for
more than 1.5 seconds.
“ ” fast forward
button
“ ” rewind
button
“ ”— “PROGRAM” button
The play pattern repeatedly will change as
follows:
ALL DISC REPEAT → 1 DISC REPEAT → 1
TRACK REPEAT → ALL DISC RANDOM → 1
DISC RANDOM → ALL DISC REPEAT
“ ”— “TITLE” button
Pushing the “TITLE” button will change
the display from CD changer to disc and
track title when the CD is programmed
with the text.
FM-AM radio operation
“FM AM” band select:
Pushing the “FM AM” band select button
will change the band FM1/FM2 or AM.
When “FM AM” band select button is
pushed while the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the
station last played.
The last station played will also come on
when the “AUDIO” button is pushed to
ON.
If another audio source is playing when
the “FM AM” band select button is turned
to ON, the other audio source will automatically be turned off and the last radio
station played will come on.
The FM stereo indicator STEREO will glow
during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio
will automatically change from stereo to
monaural reception.
TUNE (Tuning):
To change the radio frequency or PTY
name, move the joystick up (+) or down
(−).
WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving
so full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
SEEK/SCAN tuning:
SEEK tuning
Move the joystick left or right for less
than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins
from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at the next broadcasting
station or seek tuning begins for the PTY
selected name.
SCAN tuning
Move the joystick left or right for more
than 1.5 seconds. SCAN tuning begins
from high to low or low to high frequencies and stops at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Moving the joystick
again during this 5 second period will
stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.
If the joystick is not moved within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-27
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band
(six for FM1, six for FM2).
Six stations can be set for the AM band.
1. Tune to the desired station using the
joystick (SEEK/SCAN or TUNE).
2. Push and hold the desired audio control button (1 - 6). A beep sound will be
heard if it is set.
3. The band indicator will then come on
and the sound will resume. Memorizing
is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if
the fuse blows, the radio memory will be
erased. In that case, reset the desired stations.
Satellite radio operation (if so
equipped)
Satellite radio mode select:
Pushing the “SAT” button will change the
satellite radio mode SAT1 or SAT2. No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” will be displayed when the SAT
button is pushed unless option satellite
receiver and antenna were purchased and
installed, and an XM or SIRIUS satellite
radio service subscription is active.
To establish a contract and service, contact XM Satellite Radio at 1-800-8529696 or http://xmradio.com or SIRIUS
Satellite Radio at 1-800-539-7474 or http:www.sirius.com.
When “SAT” button is pushed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the
radio will come on at the channel last
played.
The last station played will also come on
when the “AUDIO” button is pushed to
ON.
If another audio source is playing when
the “SAT” button is turned to ON, the
other audio source will automatically be
turned off and the last radio channel
played will come on.
CHANNEL change:
To change the satellite radio channel,
move the joystick right (+) or left (−), to
the desired satellite radio channel.
To continuously change the channel
quickly, move the joystick and hold it.
WARNING
The radio should not be tuned while driving
so full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
CHANGE satellite radio
category:
To change the satellite radio category (for
example: ROCK, JAZZ, NEWS ...), when
satellite radio mode appears on the
screen, move the joystick up (+) or down
(−).
“PTYzCAT” mode:
O To change the display mode from satellite radio mode to category mode,
push the “PTYzCAT” button. Current
category mode will appear on the
screen.
O To select the category, move the joystick right or left, or push the
“PTYzCAT” button (“PTYzCAT” button is
only for seeking the category).
O To select the channel within the category, move the joystick up (+) or
down (−).
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Display mode:
O To display the information (for example, title, artist name) of the satellite channel, push the “ENTER” button.
For more information, move the joystick down. Move the joystick up to go
back to information display. To change
the display from information to
channel and/or category mode, push
the “PREV” button.
Station memory operations:
Twelve channels (six for SAT1, six for
SAT2) can be set for the satellite radio.
1. Tune to the desired channel using the
joystick (SEEK/SCAN or TUNE).
2. Push and hold the desired channel
control button (1 to 6) until the sound
resumes. (The satellite mutes when
the select button is pushed.)
3. The channel indicator will then come
on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if
the fuse blows, the radio memory will be
cancelled, in that case, reset the desired
channels.
Cassette tape player operation
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and
then lightly insert the cassette tape into
the tape deck in the glove box. The cassette tape will automatically be pulled
into the player.
The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on)
and the cassette tape will begin to play.
CAUTION
Do not force the cassette tape into the
SAA0862
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-29
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
tape door. This could damage the player.
If the system is turned off by pushing the
audio “OFF” button with the cassette tape
still in the player, the tape will resume
playing when the system is turned back
on.
“TAPE” button PLAY:
O When the “TAPE” button is pushed
while the CD is being played in the CD
autochanger, the CD will automatically
turn off and the tape will turn on.
O If the “TAPE” button is pushed during
either the FF, REW, APS FF or APS REW
function, the cassette tape enters the
normal play mode.
FF (Fast Forward), REW
(Rewind):
Push the “ ” (fast forward) button to
fast forward the tape. To rewind the tape,
push the “ ” (rewind) button. Either
the FF or REW symbol illuminates on the
right side of the display window.
To stop the FF or REW function, push the
“ ” (fast forward) or “ ” (rewind) again, or the TAPE button.
APS (Automatic Program
Search) FF, APS REW:
When the “ ” (APS FF) button is
pushed while the tape is being played,
the next program on the tape will start to
play from the beginning. Push the
“ ” (APS FF) button several times to
skip through programs. The tape will advance the number of times the button is
pushed (up to nine programs).
When the “ ” (APS REW) button is
pushed once, the program being played
starts over from the beginning. Push the
“ ” (APS REW) button several times
to skip back several selections. The tape
will go back the number of times the button is pushed.
Either the FF or REW symbol flashes on
the right side of the display window while
searching for the selection.
To stop the APS FF or APS REW function,
push the TAPE button.
This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a
blank interval within one program or there
is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location.
“ ” Program key:
Push the “ ” button to change the
tape side while the tape is being played.
The cassette tape will automatically
change directions to play the other side
when the first side is completed.
If the “ ” button is pushed during
the FF or REW function, the cassette tape
enters the normal play mode.
“ ” Dolby B NR (Noise
Reduction) key:
Push the “ ” button for Dolby NR encoded tapes to reduce high frequency
tape noise. The indicator will come on.
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby NR and the
double-D symbol “ ” are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Metal or chrome tape usage:
The cassette player will automatically set
to high performance play when playing a
metal or chrome cassette tape.
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
TAPE EJECT:
When this button is pushed with the tape
loaded, the tape will be ejected.
When the tape is ejected while it is being
played, the system will turn off.
1. CD select buttons
2. CD eject button
3. CD indicators
Compact disc (CD) changer
operation
Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON.
“CD” button:
When the “CD” button is pushed with the
system off and the compact disc loaded,
the system will turn on and the compact
disc will start to play.
When the “CD” button is pushed with the
compact disc loaded but the tape or the
radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically turn off and the compact disc
will start to play.
Disc insertion:
To insert a CD in the CD changer, select
the loading slot by pushing the CD select
button (1 to 6). After the slot door opens,
insert the CD.
The active CD indicator will turn red. The
other CD indicators will be green.
( “ ” , “ ”
key) Disc up/down:
Use these buttons, to select another CD.
When the “ ” button is pushed,
playing switches to the first track on the
next disc. The audio output is muted during this operation, and playing begins automatically.
When the “ ” button is pushed,
playing switches to the first track on the
previous disc. The audio output is muted
during this operation, and playing begins
automatically.
SAA0672A
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-31
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
( “ ” , “ ”
key) Track up/down:
Use these buttons to switch tracks on
CDs.
When the “ ” button is pushed,
playing switches to the beginning of the
next track. The audio output is muted
during this operation, and playing begins
automatically.
When the “ ” button is pushed,
playing switches to the beginning of the
current track. The audio output is muted
during this operation, and playing begins
automatically.
If the “ ” or “ ” button is
pushed for over 1.5 seconds, the sound
mutes to low volume and plays at high
speed in the forward (or reverse) direction
until the button is released.
( “PROGRAM” key)
program:
Push the “ ” button to change the
playing mode condition as follows.
ALL DISC → 1 DISC → 1 TRACK → ALL
DISC RANDOM → 1 DISC RANDOM → ALL
DISC
CD EJECT:
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with
the compact disc loaded, the compact
disc will be ejected.
To eject the discs selected by the CD select button, push the EJECT button for less
than 1.5 seconds.
To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button for more than 1.5 seconds.
If the compact disc comes out and is not
removed, it will be pulled back into the
slot to protect it.
If a CD is ejected by pushing the
button, and it is not taken out from
the loading slot, the CD will automatically
be reloaded to the slot to protect the CD.
(This function will not work for 8 cm diameter CDs.)
CD CARE AND CLEANING
O Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch
the surface of the disc. Do not bend
the disc.
O Always place the discs in the storage
case when they are not being used.
O To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use.
SAA0451
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O A new disc may be rough on the inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
edges by rubbing the inner and outer
edges with the side of a pen or pencil
as illustrated.
1. Volume control switch
2. Memory change/Seek and APS switch
3. PTT
4. Mode select switch
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL
“MODE” select switch
Push the mode select switch to change
the mode in the sequence of AM, FM1,
FM2, CD autochanger and Tape.
Volume control switches
Push the upper or lower side switch to increase or decrease the volume.
Tuning
Memory change (radio):
Push the tuning switch “ ” or “
” for less than 1.5 seconds to
change the radio frequency.
Seek tuning (radio):
Push the tuning switch “ ” or “
” for more than 1.5 seconds to seek
the next or previous radio station.
APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS
REW (tape or CD changer):
Push the tuning switch “ ” or
“ ” for less than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the current track
or skip to the next track. Push several
times to skip back or skip through tracks.
This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a
blank interval within one program or there
is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location.
SAA0854
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-33
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
FF REW (tape or CD changer):
Push the tuning switch “ ” or “ ”
for more than 1.5 seconds to rewind or fast
forward the tape or to change the playing
disc up or down.
To stop the FF or REW function, push the
switch you pushed for more than 1.5 seconds again.
1. Volume control switch
2. Tuning switch
3. ON/OFF switch
4. Mode select switch
5. Display
AUDIO REAR CONTROL SWITCH (if
so equipped)
The audio system can be operated using
the rear control switch.
“ONzOFF” switch
With the ignition key turned to the ACC or
ON position, push the “ONzOFF” switch to
turn the audio system ON or OFF.
“MODE” select switch
Push the “MODE” select switch to change
the mode in the sequence of AM, FM1, FM2,
CD autochanger and tape. When the tape or
CD autochanger is loaded, the mode
changes to Tape or CD autochanger.
Tuning switch
Memory change (radio):
Push the tuning switch “ ” (rear) or
“ ” (front) for less than 1.5 seconds to
change the radio frequency.
Seek tuning (radio):
Push the tuning switch “ ” or “ ”
for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next
or previous radio station.
SAA0674A
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS
REW (tape or CD changer):
Push the “ ” switch “ ” or
“ ” for less 1.5 seconds to return to
the beginning of the present program or
skip to the next program. Push several
times to skip back or skip through programs.
This system searches for the blank intervals between selections. If there is a
blank interval within one program or there
is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location.
FF REW (tape or CD changer):
Push the tuning switch “ ” or
“ ” for more than 1.5 seconds to rewind or fast forward the tape or to change
the playing disc up or down.
To stop the FF or REW function, push the
switch you pushed for more than 1.5 seconds again.
Volume control switch
Push the “ ” (front) side or “ ”
(rear) side of the switch to adjust the volume.
“ ” Front side: Volume increases
“ ” Rear side: Volume decreases
ANTENNA
Window antenna
The antenna pattern is printed inside the
rear window.
CAUTION
O Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any metal
parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.
O When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.
When installing a car phone or a CB radio
in your INFINITI, be sure to observe the
following cautions, otherwise the new
equipment may adversely affect the electronic control modules and electronic control system harness.
WARNING
O A cellular telephone should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular
telephones while driving.
O If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
O If a conversation in a moving vehicle
requires you to take notes, pull off the
road to a safe location and stop your
vehicle before doing so.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-35
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
CAUTION
O Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules.
O Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control system harness. Do not route the
antenna wire next to any harness.
O Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
O Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
O For details, consult an INFINITI dealer.
The display screen shows vehicle information for your convenience.
The information shown on the screen
should be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
1. Push the “INFO” button on the control
panel.
The following display will appear.
2. Choose an item using the joystick and
push the “ENTER” button.
3. After viewing or adjusting the information on the following screens, push
the “PREV” button to return to the VEHICLE INFORMATION menu.
SAA0837
VEHICLE INFORMATION
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
TRIP COMPUTER INFORMATION
Elapsed Time, Driving Distance and Average Speed will be displayed.
To reset, use the joystick to highlight the
“Reset” key and push the “ENTER” button
immediately before driving the vehicle.
FUEL ECONOMY INFORMATION
Average fuel economy and distance to
empty will be displayed for reference.
To reset the Average Fuel Economy, use
the joystick to highlight the “Reset” key
and push the “ENTER” button.
If the “Fuel Economy Record” key is highlighted with the joystick and the “ENTER”
button is pushed, the average fuel consumption history will be displayed in
graph form along with the average for the
previous Reset-to-Reset period.
SAA0638 SAA0582A SAA0855
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-37
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
To set the maintenance interval for the
Engine Oil, Oil Filter or Tire Rotation,
choose an item using the joystick and
push the “ENTER” button.
You can also set to display a message to
remind you that the maintenance needs
to be performed.
The following example shows how to set
the engine oil change interval. Use the
same steps to set the other maintenance
information.
1. Reset the driving distance to the new
maintenance schedule.
2. Set the interval (mileage) of the maintenance schedule. To determine the
recommended maintenance interval,
refer to your “INFINITI Service and
Maintenance Guide”.
3. To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically when the set
trip distance is reached, highlight the
“Display Maintenance Notification”
key with the joystick and push the
“ENTER” button.
4. To return the display to MAINTENANCE
INFO., push the “PREV” button.
Maintenance information display cannot
be operated when the vehicle is moving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place to see the
information.
SAA0584 SAA0802
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
MAINTENANCE NOTICE
The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen (“ENGINE OIL”, “TIRE ROTATION” or “OIL FIL-
TER”) will be automatically displayed as
shown when both of the following conditions are met:
O the vehicle is driven the set distance
and the ignition key is turned OFF.
O the ignition key is turned ON the next
time the vehicle will be driven.
To return to the previous display after the
“MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed, push the PREV button.
The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen displays each time the key is turned ON until
one of the following conditions are met:
O “RESET” is selected.
O “Display Maintenance Notification” is
set OFF.
O the maintenance interval is set again.
TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
To view “Tire Pressure” information, push
the “INFO” button, select “TIRE PRESSURE” using the joystick and push the
“ENTER” button.
Pressure indication in ** psi on the
screen indicates that the pressure is
being measured. After a few driving trips,
the pressures for all 4 tires will be displayed.
The order of tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond
with the actual order of the tire position.
SAA0858 SAA0586
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-39
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
In case of low tire pressure, the FLAT TIRE
warning light will come on and/or a warning is displayed on the screen:
FLAT TIRE — low tire air pressure
Tire pressure rises and falls depend on
heat by vehicle’s traveling condition and
ambient temperature.
WARNING
O When the low tire pressure warning
light is on and/or a WARNING is displayed on the screen, check all tire
pressures.
Please refer to the “6. In case of emergency” section for repairing.
O If the system is malfunctioning, a
WARNING for tire pressure will be indicated on the display.
To confirm the details, push the “ENTER” button.
O When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the pressure will not
be indicated and the low tire pressure
warning system will not function. Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
This display will appear when the door is
not securely closed while driving over 3
MPH (5 km/h).
This display will disappear when the vehicle speed slows down under 3 MPH (5
km/h) even if the door is not securely
closed yet.
Make sure to stop the vehicle and close
the door securely.
The “Low washer fluid” display will also
appear when the washer fluid level becomes low. Refill the fluid when this display appears. See “8. Maintenance and
SAA0863
WARNING DISPLAY
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
do-it-yourself” for refilling. The VACS (Voice-Activated Control
System) provides a safe and convenient
way of controlling vehicle systems such
as the audio, climate control and navigation (if so equipped). The system is controlled by the PTT (Push-To-Talk) button
located on the steering wheel. Voice commands are picked up by a microphone.
When giving a command, voice feedback
will be heard through the speaker, and
messages will be shown on the display.
Voice feedback can be turned off. Personal directories of nametags for radio
station presets can be created, and
spoken command help is provided.
FEATURES
The VACS provides the following features:
O Speaker-independent continuous
natural speech recognition engine
O Speaker adaptation or out-of-dialect
speakers for two different users
O Audible voice feedback (prompt, error,
confirmation, and speaker adaptation
dialogue)
O Personal vocabulary (radio nametags,
etc.)
O On-line help (general such as “Help”,
and more specific such as “Help Radio”)
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the initialization of the
system is carried out, which takes a few
seconds. When complete, the system is
ready to accept voice commands. If the
button is pushed before initialization is
complete, the message center display will
show “VOICE NOT READY”.
Operating tips
To get the best results from the system,
observe the following:
O Close the window before operating the
voice-activated control system (VACS).
The voice-activated control system
may not be able to recognize voice
commands due to surrounding noises
(travel noise and vibration). Be sure to
operate the system when the vehicle
interior is quiet. Set the fan speed to
lower than level 3 when operating the
Push-To-Talk (PTT) button.
O After pushing the PTT button, always
wait for the beep before speaking.
VOICE-ACTIVATED CONTROL SYSTEM
(VACS)
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-41
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.
Giving voice commands
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Push the instant PTT button jA on the
steering wheel.
3. The beep will sound.
If the system is processing a command,
an error beep will sound and a message
such as “COMMAND CANCELED”, will be
displayed.
4. If the VACS is activated, “LISTENING”
will be displayed on the screen.
5. Speak a command*.
*: Refer to the command list later in this
section.
O If you do not speak a command
within 5 seconds, the beep will sound
and “NO SPEECH DETECTED” will be
displayed on the screen.
O To cancel the command, press the PTT
button again during feedback. The
“COMMAND CANCELED” will be displayed on the screen.
6. If a command is activated, audio and
visual feedback will be provided.
7. To skip the audio feedback for a command, push the PTT button during
feedback.
PERSONAL VOCABULARY
The VACS provides 20 personal nametags
that can be associated with radio stations. The maximum length for each
nametag is 3.75 seconds.
The VACS provides two personal
nametags that can be associated with
speaker adaptation memory locations.
The length for each nametag is 3.0 seconds.
SAA0857
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
HOW TO SAY NUMBERS
Numbers in voice commands must be
given as follows. Either “zero” or “oh”
can be used for “0”. For information
about specific commands, see the Voice
command descriptions on the following
page.
Radio stations
Radio frequencies should be spoken as
follows:
O “Select nine thirty AM”, or “Select
nine thirty” (930).
O “Select one thousand” (1000).
O “Select ten forty” (1040).
O “Select thirteen hundred” (1300).
O “Select seventeen ten” (1710).
O “Select ninety seven point nine FM”,
or “Select ninety seven point nine”
(97.9).
O “Tune one hundred point five” (100.5).
O “Tune one oh one point one FM”
(101.1).
Temperatures (climate control)
In climate control commands, say temperatures as in the following examples.
O “Temperature seventy four” (74). —
For Fahrenheit (°F)
O “Temperature twenty one point five”
(21.5). — For Centigrade (°C)
O “Temperature nineteen point zero”,
“Temperature nineteen point oh”, or
“Temperature nineteen” (19.0). — For
°C
VOICE COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
In the command descriptions, optional
words are shown in square brackets [ ].
Data items that you need to enter, such
as phone numbers, are shown in italics.
For information on entering numbers in
commands, see “How to say numbers”.
General commands
O [VOICE] FEEDBACK ON/OFF
Turns voice feedback successively on
and off.
O VOICE DELETE MEMORY A/B
Deletes the trained voice stored in
memory A or B.
O VOICE [PLAY] DIRECTORY
Lists the personal nametags stored
with each memory location.
O VOICE DELETE DIRECTORY
Deletes the personal nametags stored
with each memory location.
Dialog commands
O YES/NO
Confirms a command after the prompt
“Please say YES or NO”.
O CANCEL
Cancels a command after the prompt
“Please say YES, NO or CANCEL”.
O CORRECT/CORRECTION
To clear the last group of numbers entered when using the phone enter
command.
O STORE
To store the phone number, say
STORE after entering the phone
number.
Help commands
O HELP
Gives spoken information about the
voice activation system.
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-43
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O HELP DIRECTORY
Gives spoken information about the
directory voice commands.
O HELP RADIO
Gives spoken information about the
radio voice commands.
O HELP RADIO MEMORY
Gives spoken information about the
radio memory commands.
O HELP TAPE/CASSETTE
Gives spoken information about the
cassette tape voice commands.
Example:
• HELP TAPE
• HELP CASSETTE
O HELP CD [CHANGER/DJ]
Gives spoken information about the
CD player voice commands. (if so
equipped)
O HELP AUDIO
Gives spoken information about the
audio voice commands.
O HELP CLIMATE [CONTROL]
Gives spoken information about the
climate control voice commands.
O HELP DISPLAY
Gives spoken information about the
display commands.
O HELP VOICE MEMORY
Gives spoken information about the
voice memory commands.
O HELP NAVIGATION
Gives spoken information about the
navigation commands. (if so
equipped)
Radio commands
O RADIO ON/OFF
Turns the radio system on or off.
O RADIO PLAY
Turns the sound system on. Selects
the radio, with the last waveband and
station to be played.
O RADIO SEEK/SEARCH [UP]/DOWN
Seeks up or down the current band
until the next station is found.
O [RADIO] TUNE/SELECT frequency
[AM/FM]
RADIO frequency [AM/FM]
Tunes to the frequency given in the
command.
The frequency ranges are:
FM bands — 87.9 to 107.9 MHz in
steps of 0.2 MHz, and
AM bands — 530 to 1710 kHz in steps
of 10 kHz.
Example:
• TUNE NINETY SEVEN POINT NINE
(97.9)
• RADIO TUNE TEN FORTY AM
O [RADIO] TUNE nametag, RADIO SELECT
nametag
Selects the stored station with the
nametag given in the command. A
total of 20 radio nametags can be
stored.
Example:
• TUNE COUNTRY (nametag)
• RADIO SELECT WDET (nametag)
O [RADIO] [TUNE/SELECT]
PRESET memory number,
AM/FM/FM1/FM2 PRESET memory
number AM/FM/FM1/FM2
Selects the stored station corresponding to the preset number (1 to 6) given
in the command.
Example:
• TUNE PRESET ONE FM1
• RADIO SELECT PRESET THREE AM
• PRESET ONE FM1
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O [RADIO] [SELECT] [BAND] AM/FM/FM1/
FM2
Turns to the band given in the command and selects the last station
played.
Example:
• RADIO SELECT FM1
• SELECT BAND AM
O RADIO STORE [NAME]
Stores the currently selected station,
with a nametag, in the voice system
memory. When prompted, the chosen
nametag must be spoken, and confirmed. A total of 20 nametags can be
stored.
The sound system must be in radio
mode before giving the Radio Store
command.
O RADIO DELETE nametag
Deletes the station and nametag corresponding to the nametag given in
the command from the voice system
memory.
O RADIO DELETE DIRECTORY
Deletes all currently stored radio stations and their nametags from the
voice system memory.
O RADIO [PLAY] DIRECTORY
Gives a spoken list of station
nametags and frequencies currently
stored in the voice system memory.
Tape commands
O TAPE/CASSETTE ON/OFF
Starts or stops the cassette tape.
O TAPE/CASSETTE PLAY
Selects the cassette tape player. Any
tape currently loaded will start to play.
O [TAPE/CASSETTE] REVERSE/CHANGE
SIDES
Reverses the direction of the cassette
tape being played. The other side of
the tape is played from the current position of the tape.
Example:
• TAPE REVERSE
• CASSETTE CHANGE SIDES
O [TAPE/CASSETTE] REWIND
Selects the Rewind mode.
O [TAPE/CASSETTE] FAST FORWARD
Selects the Fast Forward mode.
O TAPE/CASSETTE SEEK/SEARCH [UP]/
DOWN
Seeks up or down the tape to find the
next track.
O [TAPE/CASSETTE] DOLBY ON/OFF
Selects Dolby on or off.
CD changer commands
O CD [CHANGER/DJ] ON/OFF
Starts or stops the CD player.
O CD [CHANGER/DJ] PLAY
Selects the CD player, with settings
corresponding to the last CD and track
to be played.
O [CD] [CHANGER/DJ] NEXT/PREVIOUS
DISC/CD
[CD] [CHANGER/DJ] DISC/CD UP/DOWN
Selects disc up or down.
O [CD] [CHANGER/DJ] NEXT/PREVIOUS
TRACK
[CD] [CHANGER/DJ] TRACK UP/DOWN
Selects track up or down.
O [CD] [CHANGER/DJ] PROGRAM
Selects normal, 1 disc repeat, 1 track
repeat, 1 disc random and all discs
random in sequence.
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-45
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Audio commands
O AUDIO ON/OFF
Turn the sound system on or off.
O [AUDIO/RADIO/TAPE/CD
(CHANGER/DJ)] [TONE] BASS UP/DOWN
Increases or decreases the bass level
by 1.
O [AUDIO/RADIO/TAPE/CD
(CHANGER/DJ)] [TONE] TREBLE
UP/DOWN
Increases or decreases the treble level
by 1.
Automatic climate control
commands
O [CLIMATE/CLIMATE CONTROL] AUTO-
MATIC [ON]
Turns the climate control system on in
automatic mode.
O CLIMATE-[CONTROL]-[SELECT]/
[SELECT]-TEMPERATURE/CLIMATE-
[CONTROL]-[SELECT]-TEMPERATURE
temperature [DEGREES]
Set the climate control temperature to
the value given in the command.
Example:
• CLIMATE 74 (seventy four)
• SELECT TEMPERATURE 74 FAHREN-
HEIT
• CLIMATE TEMPERATURE 74
O [CLIMATE]/[CLIMATE CONTROL] TEM-
PERATURE UP/DOWN
Increases or decreases the temperature
setting by 1 degree.
Example:
• CLIMATE TEMPERATURE UP
• CLIMATE TEMPERATURE DOWN
O CLIMATE [CONTROL] ON/OFF
Turns the climate control system on or
off.
O [CLIMATE]/[CLIMATE CONTROL]
DEFROST/DEFOG [ON]/OFF
Turns the defrost or defog system on
or off.
Example:
• CLIMATE CONTROL DEFOG
• CLIMATE DEFROST OFF
O CLIMATE [CONTROL] DUAL [ON]/OFF
Turns dual mode or balance mode on
or off.
Example:
• CLIMATE DUAL
• CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
Display commands
O [DISPLAY] [SHOW] PREVIOUS [SCREEN]
Turns the display to the previous display.
Example:
• PREVIOUS
• DISPLAY PREVIOUS
• PREVIOUS SCREEN
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Navigation commands (if so
equipped)
Refer to the separate Navigation Owner’s
Manual.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two outof-dialect users to train the system to improve recognition accuracy. By repeating
a number of commands, the users can
create a voice model of their own voice
that is stored in the VACS. The VACS is
capable of storing two different speaker
adaptation models in the memory location
A/B.
If memory A is available, the VACS will
use memory A to store the model. If
memory A is in use and memory B is
available, the VACS will use memory B to
store the model. If both of the memory locations are in use, the VACS will ask user
to select which memory location should
be overwritten.
Training procedure
The procedure for training a voice is as
follows.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably
quiet outdoor location.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine
running, the parking brake on, and the
transmission in Park.
3. Push and hold the PTT button for 3
seconds. The display shows ENTERING
TRAINING.
4. Voice memory A or B is selected automatically. At this time, “TRAINING
MODE VOICE A or B” is displayed.
5. When preparation is complete, push
the PTT button.
6. The SA mode will be explained. Follow
the instructions.
7. When the training is finished, “RECORDING COMPLETE” will be displayed.
8. “PLEASE SAY YOUR NAME” will then
be displayed. Follow the instructions
and register your name.
9. When the registered name is confirmed, “TRAINING COMPLETE” will be
displayed, thereby completing the SA
mode.
10.The SA mode will stop if any of the following operations is carried out.
O When the PTT button is pushed for
more than 3 seconds in the SA mode
O When the vehicle is driven during the
SA mode
O When the key is turned to OFF
Training phrase
During the SA mode, the VACS instructs
the trainer to say the following phrases.
(The timing of input phrases is indicated
by the VACS.)
O temperature eighteen point five degrees
O phone dial memory nineteen
O audio tone treble up
O tune seventeen hundred and ten
O phone enter three zero seven two nine
O radio select hundred and five point
one FM
O climate control twenty two point oh
degrees
O telephone store zero five four four six
O map route guidance off
O CD changer tone bass down
O tune fourteen ten AM
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-47
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O navigation cancel route guidance
O telephone dial memory ninety eight
O cassette Dolby on
O display show previous screen
O temperature thirty three point zero degrees
O CDDJ tone treble up
O navigation save present position
O map where am I
O select a hundred and seven point nine
FM
O tape fast forward
O telephone enter star zero eight eight
nine
O select thirteen hundred fifty AM
O map store current location
O radio twelve eighty AM
O navigation show next intersection
O climate control defrost on
O tune eleven sixty AM
O enter pound nine oh zero one
O CDDJ play
O phone delete directory
O cassette change sides
O radio sixteen forty AM
O tune fifteen hundred seventy
O map voice mute off
O show bird view
O navigation go home
O map zoom in
O radio select preset one FM two
O CD changer disc down
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions
given in this guide for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message Solution
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” or the system fails to
interpret the command correctly.
1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see Command list in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is given after the tone while “LISTENING” is displayed.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.
6. If a number of commands have been given in rapid succession resulting in the message “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” to be
displayed, then allow the system to recover (approximately one minute) before trying the command again.
7. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker.
Displays “NO SPEECH DETECTED”.
1. Ensure that the command is given after the tone while “LISTENING” is displayed.
2. Ensure that the command is given within a maximum of five seconds from the end of the tone.
NOTE:
Be sure you know what to say before pushing the Voice button.
Displays “NAMETAG NOT
UNIQUE”.
1. This response will be received when storing a nametag if the nametag being given has already been stored. This can be confirmed by giving the Radio Directory of Phone Directory command.
2. If this response is received and the nametag has not been used already, then it is too similar to an existing nametag or voice
grammar and an alternative should be used.
The system consistently selects
the wrong nametag.
1. Ensure that the nametag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by giving the Radio Directory or
Phone Directory command.
2. Delete one of the nametags being confused and replace it with a different nametag.
Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems 4-49
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
MEMO
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio and voice-activated control systems
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ............. 5-2
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .................. 5-2
Three-way catalyst ...................................... 5-3
Low tire pressure warning system............... 5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover .................... 5-5
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving............. 5-5
Ignition switch ................................................. 5-6
Automatic transmission............................... 5-6
Key positions .............................................. 5-7
INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System ......... 5-7
Before starting the engine................................ 5-8
Starting the engine .......................................... 5-9
Driving the vehicle ........................................... 5-9
Automatic transmission............................... 5-9
Parking brake................................................. 5-14
Cruise control................................................. 5-14
Precautions on cruise control.................... 5-14
Cruise control operations .......................... 5-15
Intelligent cruise control system
(if so equipped).............................................. 5-16
Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode............................................. 5-17
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode ........................................................ 5-17
Precautions on vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode ........................................... 5-18
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance mode
operation .................................................. 5-20
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode ........................................................ 5-33
Preview function (for Intelligent Cruise Control
system equipped models) ......................... 5-37
Break-in schedule........................................... 5-37
Increasing fuel economy ................................ 5-37
Parking/parking on hills................................. 5-38
Power steering ............................................... 5-39
Active damper suspension.............................. 5-39
Brake system ................................................. 5-40
Brake assist ................................................... 5-41
Brake assist .............................................. 5-41
Preview function (Intelligent Cruise Control
system equipped model) ........................... 5-41
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .................... 5-43
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system ........... 5-44
Cold weather driving ...................................... 5-46
Freeing a frozen door lock ........................ 5-46
Antifreeze.................................................. 5-46
Battery ...................................................... 5-46
Draining of coolant water.......................... 5-46
Tire equipment.......................................... 5-46
Special winter equipment.......................... 5-47
Driving on snow or ice .............................. 5-47
Engine block heater (if so equipped)......... 5-48
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
WARNING
O Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support of
others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should not be left alone either. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
O Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the
trunk closed, when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.
EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)
WARNING
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain
colorless and odorless carbon monoxide.
Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can
cause unconsciousness or death.
O If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
O Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
O Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
O Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,
otherwise exhaust gases could be
drawn into the passenger compartment.
If you must drive with the trunk lid
open, follow these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the air recirculation button
to off and the fan control at 4 (high)
to circulate the air.
O If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through
the seal on the trunk lid or the body,
follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle.
O If a special body, camper or other
equipment is added for recreational or
other usage, follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation to prevent carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle. Do not
occupy these areas while the engine is
running even if the vehicle is parked.
Some recreational vehicle appliances
such as stoves, refrigerator, heaters,
etc. may also generate carbon monoxide.
O The exhaust system and body should
be inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering into the passenger
compartment.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
5-2 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission
control device installed in the exhaust
system. Exhaust gases in the three-way
catalyst are burned at high temperatures
to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
O The exhaust gas and the exhaust
system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from
the exhaust system components.
O Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
CAUTION
O Do not use leaded gasoline.
Deposits from leaded gasoline seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s
ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
O Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep
driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other
unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly by an INFINITI dealer.
O Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the three-way catalyst.
O Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING
SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with the low tire
pressure warning system. It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
When the low tire pressure warning light
is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. The system also displays pressure of all tires (except the
spare tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed
in each wheel.
The low tire pressure warning system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also,
this system may not detect a sudden drop
in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire
while driving).
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may
cause the low tire pressure warning light
to illuminate.
If the warning light illuminates in low outside temperatures as described above,
check the tire pressure for all four tires.
Starting and driving 5-3
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label to turn
the low tire pressure warning light OFF.
Frequently check the tire pressure information display on the monitor screen and
adjust pressure of each tire properly. (The
order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen does not correspond
with the actual order of the tire position.)
See “Vehicle information” in the “4.
Monitor, climate, audio and voiceactivated control systems” section for tire
pressure monitor. If you select the tire
pressure information in the display, the
FLAT TIRE warning message will be displayed.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure (lower than 27 psi, 190 kPa), the
low tire pressure warning message will be
displayed on the monitor screen. The low
tire pressure warning light comes on, and
the chime sounds for about 10 seconds.
For additional information regarding the
above warning, see “Warning/indicator
lights and audible reminders” in the “2.
Instruments and controls” section.
WARNING
O If the low tire pressure warning light
flashes while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Serious vehicle
damage could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in serious
personal injury. Check the pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a
flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible. (See “Flat tire” in the
“6. In case of emergency” section for
changing a flat tire.)
O If your vehicle is equipped with run-flat
tires, you can continue driving after you
have a flat tire. However, remember
that vehicle handling stability is reduced, which could lead to an accident and personal injury. See “Wheels
and tires” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section for more details
and make sure to observe the cautions
about run-flat tires. Failure to do so
may result in a serious accident.
O When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not
be indicated and the low tire pressure
warning system will not function. Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
O Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
may cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and the low
5-4 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
tire pressure warning system will not function properly.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and
prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these
driving practices could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in a
collision with other vehicles or objects, or
cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly
if the loss of control causes the vehicle to
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times,
and avoid driving when tired. Never drive
when under the influence of alcohol or
drugs (including prescription or over-thecounter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the “Seat belts” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted or improperly belted
person is significantly more likely to be
injured or killed than a person properly
wearing a seat belt.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/
DRUGS AND DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of
being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase
the severity of the injury.
INFINITI is committed to safe driving. You
must not drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol related accidents. Although the local laws vary on
what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all
people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t
mix!
And that’s true for drugs too (over the
Starting and driving 5-5
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
counter, prescription, and illegal drugs).
Don’t drive if your ability to operate your
vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or
some other physical condition.
WARNING
Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK
position while driving. The steering wheel
will lock. This may cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle and could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The ignition switch is equipped with an
anti-theft steering lock device.
The key can only be removed when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
The ignition lock is designed so that the
key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the selector lever is moved to
the P (Park) position.
When removing the key from the ignition,
make sure the selector lever is in the P
(Park) position.
SSD0216C
IGNITION SWITCH
5-6 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
If the selector lever is not returned to P
(Park), the key cannot be moved toward
LOCK.
When the key cannot be turned toward
the LOCK position, proceed as follows to
remove the key:
1. Move the selector lever into the P
(Park) position.
2. Turn the ignition key slightly in the ON
direction.
3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key.
If the key is removed from the ignition
switch, the select lever cannot be moved
from P (Park). The selector lever can be
moved if the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the foot brake pedal is depressed.
There is an OFF position jA in between
LOCK and ACC, although it does not show
on the lock cylinder. When the ignition is
in the OFF position the steering wheel is
not locked.
In order for the steering wheel to be
locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a
turn clockwise from the straight up position.
To unlock the steering wheel, insert the
key and turn it gently while rotating the
steering wheel slightly right and left.
Emergency release steering lock
When the battery is discharged, the steering lock may not be released. Proceed as
follows to release the steering lock.
1. Remove the emergency key from the
electronic ignition key. See “How to
use the emergency key” in the “3. Predriving checks and adjustments” section.
2. To unlock the steering wheel, insert
the emergency key deeply and turn it
gently while rotating the steering
wheel slightly right and left.
KEY POSITIONS
LOCK Normal parking position (0)
OFF (1)
The engine can be turned off without
locking the steering wheel.
The ignition lock is designed so that the
key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed until the selector lever is moved to
the P (Park) position.
ACC (Accessories) (2)
This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is
not running.
ON Normal operating position (3)
This position turns on the ignition system
and the electrical accessories.
START (4)
This position activates the starter motor,
starting the engine.
INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered INFINITI Vehicle
Immobilizer System key (hereafter “Electronic ignition key”).
The engine may not start with the registered electronic ignition key under the following conditions:
Starting and driving 5-7
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
j1 If metal contacts the electronic ignition key.
j2 If a device equipped with a transponder contacts the electronic ignition key.
If the engine fails to start using the registered electronic ignition key (for example,
when interference is caused by another
electronic ignition key, an automated toll
road device or automated payment device
on the key ring), restart the engine using
the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
5 seconds.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered electronic ignition key.
If the no start condition re-occurs,
INFINITI recommends placing the registered electronic ignition key on a separate
key ring to avoid interference from other
transponder equipped devices.
O Make sure the area around the vehicle
is clear.
O Maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically, for example
each time you check engine oil.
O Check that all windows and lights are
clean.
O Visually inspect tires for condition.
Also check tire pressure.
O Lock all doors.
O Position seat and adjust head restraints.
O Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
O Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.
O Check the operation of warning lights
when the key is turned to the ON (3)
position.
SIC1611B
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
5-8 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the selector lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). (P preferred.)
The starter is designed not to operate if
the selector lever is in one of the driving
positions.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when
the engine starts. If the engine starts,
but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
O If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator
pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to
the floor) and hold it then crank the
engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine
starts.
O If the engine is very hard to start
because it is flooded, depress the
accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and hold it. Crank the engine
for 5 to 6 seconds. After cranking
the engine, release the accelerator
pedal. Crank the engine with your
foot off the accelerator pedal by
turning the ignition key to START.
Release the key when the engine
starts. If the engine starts, but fails
to run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15
seconds at a time. If the engine does not
start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds
before cranking again, otherwise the
starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
seconds after starting. Do not race the
engine while warming it up. Drive at
moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather.
In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes
before shutting it off. Starting and
stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle
more difficult to start.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Gate type shift with manual mode
The automatic transmission in your vehicle
is electronically controlled by a transmission control module to produce maximum
power and smooth operation.
Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this
transmission. Follow these procedures for
maximum vehicle performance and
driving enjoyment.
Starting the vehicle
After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before shifting the selector lever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D
(Drive) or manual shift mode position. Be
sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the selector lever.
This automatic transmission is designed
so that the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to
any drive position while the ignition
switch is ON.
The selector lever cannot be moved out of
P (Park) and into any of the other gear
positions if the ignition key is turned to
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the
STARTING THE ENGINE DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Starting and driving 5-9
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
key is removed from the ignition switch.
1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and shift the selector lever into a driving gear.
2. Release the parking brake and foot
brake, then gradually start the vehicle
in motion.
WARNING
O Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manual
shift mode. Always depress the brake
pedal until shifting is completed.
Failure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
O Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
O Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving. These
could cause an accident.
O On slippery roads, do not downshift.
This may cause a loss of control.
CAUTION
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot
brakes should be used for this purpose.
Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal and shift the selector lever
from P (Park) to R (Reverse), D (Drive),
Manual shift mode or any of the desired
shift positions.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the selector
lever is in any position while the engine is
not running. Failure to do so could cause
SSD0217
5-10 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal injury
or property damage.
If the key is turned to OFF or ACC for any
reason while the vehicle is in R (Reverse),
N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the
key cannot be turned to LOCK and be removed from the ignition switch. Additionally, the selector lever cannot be moved
to R (Reverse) from N (Neutral) or any D
(Drive) position. The selector lever can be
moved to R (Reverse) from any of the D
(Drive) positions within 3 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or
OFF position. The selector lever can be
moved from R (Reverse) to P (Park) with
the key in the OFF or ACC position.
If the key cannot be turned to LOCK, perform the following steps:
1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stopped.
2. Turn the key to ON.
3. Depress the foot brake pedal if the vehicle is in the N (Neutral) or any D
(Drive) position.
4. If necessary, move the selector lever
to P (Park) or N (Neutral) to restart the
vehicle (P is preferred) or move the selector lever to P (Park) to park the vehicle.
5. Turn the ignition key to LOCK to remove the key.
P (Park):
Use this selector position when the vehicle
is parked or when starting the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped. For maximum safety, depress the
brake pedal, then move the lever to the P
(Park) position. The brake pedal must be
depressed any time the selector lever is
moved to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking
brake first, then move the lever to the P
(Park) position.
R (Reverse):
Use this position to back up. Always be
sure the vehicle is completely stopped
when selecting R (Reverse). The brake
pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever from P (Park), N (Neutral), or
any drive position to R (Reverse).
Rear view monitor
When the selector lever is shifted into the
R (Reverse) position, the monitor display
shows a rear view of the vehicle.
WARNING
O The rear view camera is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper
backing or lane changing procedures.
Always turn and check that it is safe to
do so before backing up or changing
lanes. Always back up slowly.
O Objects viewed in the rear view monitor
differ from actual distance because a
wide-angle lens is used. Objects will
appear visually opposite than when
viewed in the rear view and outside
mirrors.
O Do not put anything on the rear view
camera. The rear view camera is installed beside the license plate light.
N (Neutral):
Neither forward or reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this
position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and
restart a stalled engine while the vehicle
is moving.
Starting and driving 5-11
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward
driving.
Manual shift mode
When the selector lever is shifted from D
to the manual shift gate with the vehicle
stopped or while driving, the transmission
enters the manual shift mode. Shift
ranges can be selected manually.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is
displayed on the position indicator in the
meter. When shifting the shift lever to the
manual shift gate, the position indicator
first displays M4 (Fourth)
Shift ranges up or down one by one as
follows:
M1

← M2

← M3

← M4

← M5
M5 (Fifth):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
M4 (Fourth):
For driving up or down long slopes where
engine braking would be advantageous.
M3 (Third) and M2 (Second):
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on
down hill grades.
M1 (First):
Use this position when climbing steep
hills slowly or driving slowly through
deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum
engine braking on steep downhill grades.
O Remember not to drive at high speeds
for extended periods of time in lower
than M4 range. This reduces fuel
economy.
When shifting up:
Move the selector lever to the + (up) side.
(Shifts to higher range.)
When shifting down:
Move the selector lever to the − (down)
side. (Shifts to lower range.)
O The transmission will automatically
shift the gears between the 1st and
the selected range. (For example, if
you select the 3rd range, the transmission will shift up or down between the
1st and 3rd gears.)
O Moving the selector lever rapidly to
the same side twice will shift the
ranges in succession.
When canceling the manual shift mode:
Return the selector lever to the D position
to return the transmission to the normal
driving mode.
O In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected
gear. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of
vehicle damage or loss of control.
O When the vehicle speed decreases,
the transmission automatically shifts
down and shifts to 1st gear before the
vehicle comes to a stop.
5-12 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Shift lock release
If the battery is discharged, the selector
lever may not be moved from the P (Park)
position even with the brake pedal depressed.
To move the selector lever, depress the
brake pedal, remove the cover and push
the shift lock release button using a suitable tool. The selector lever can be moved
to N (Neutral). This allows the vehicle to
be moved if the battery is discharged. If
the steering wheel is locked, unlock the
steering wheel by using the emergency
key or the wallet key.
If the battery is discharged, the selector
lever may not be moved to the R (Reverse)
position from N (Neutral) or any D (Drive)
position. To park the vehicle, push the
shift lock release button and move the
shift lever to P (Park) through R (Reverse).
If the lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have your INFINITI dealer check
the automatic transmission system as
soon as possible.
Accelerator downshift
— In D position —
For passing or hill climbing, fully depress
the accelerator pedal to the floor. This
shifts the transmission down into a lower
gear, depending on the vehicle speed.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the
next time the key is turned to the ON position, the light will blink for approximately 8 seconds after coming on for
2 seconds. While the vehicle can be
driven under these circumstances please
note that the gears in the automatic
transmission will be locked in 4th gear.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the
fail-safe system may be activated. This
will occur even if all electrical circuits are
functioning properly. In this case, turn
the ignition key OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON
position. The vehicle should return to its
normal operating condition. If it does not
return to its normal operating condition,
have your INFINITI dealer check the
transmission and repair if necessary.
SSD0373
Starting and driving 5-13
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
To apply: Fully depress the parking brake
pedal jA .
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Depress the parking brake pedal jA
and the parking brake will be released.
3. Before driving, be sure the brake
warning light goes out.
WARNING
O Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
O Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
O Do not use the gear shift in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure
the parking brake is fully engaged.
O Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
O If the cruise control system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The
SET indicator light in the meter assembly will then blink to warn the
driver.
O If the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the cruise
control system will be canceled automatically.
O If the SET indicator light blinks, turn
the cruise control main switch off and
have the system checked by your
INFINITI dealer.
O The SET indicator light may sometimes
blink when the cruise control main
switch is turned ON while pushing the
RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST or
CANCEL switch (located on the steering
wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, perform the steps below in
the order indicated.
SPA1286D
PARKING BRAKE CRUISE CONTROL
5-14 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
O when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed.
O in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed.
O on winding or hilly roads.
O on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
O in very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.
1. MAIN (ONzOFF) switch
2. SET/COAST switch
3. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch
4. CANCEL switch
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a
speed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144
km/h) without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
main switch on. The CRUISE indicator
light will come on.
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the
SET/COAST switch and release it. (The
SET indicator light will come on.) Take
your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your
vehicle will maintain the set speed.
O To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release
the pedal, the vehicle will return to
the previously set speed.
O The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed on winding or hilly roads. If
this happens, drive without the cruise
control.
To cancel the preset speed, follow any of
these methods:
a) Push the CANCEL button. The SET indicator light will go out.
b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator
light will go out.
c) Move the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position. The SET indicator light
will go out.
d) Turn the main switch off. Both the
CRUISE indicator and SET indicator
lights will go out.
O If you depress the brake pedal while
pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE or
SSD0374
Starting and driving 5-15
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
SET/COAST switch and reset at the
cruising speed, the cruise control will
disengage. Turn the main switch off
once and then turn it on again.
O The cruise control will automatically
cancel if the vehicle slows down below
approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:
O Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the SET/COAST
switch.
O Push and hold the RESUME/
ACCELERATE set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
O Push, then quickly release the
RESUME/ACCELERATE set switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:
O Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed,
push the SET/COAST switch and release it.
O Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows down to the desired speed.
O Push, then quickly release the
SET/COAST switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will decrease by
about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE set
switch. The vehicle will resume the last
set cruising speed when the vehicle
speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling
in front of you according to that vehicle’s
speed (up to the set speed), or at the set
speed when the road ahead is clear.
The ICC function can be set to one of two
cruise control modes:
O Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode:
For maintaining a selected distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you up to the preset speed.
O Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode:
For cruising at a preset speed.
WARNING
O Always drive carefully and attentively
when using either cruise control mode.
Read and understand the Owner’s
Manual thoroughly before using the
cruise control. To avoid serious injury
or death, do not rely on the system to
prevent accidents or to control the veINTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
5-16 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
hicle’s speed in emergency situations.
Do not use cruise control except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.
O In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode, a warning buzzer will not
sound to warn you if you are too close to
the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention
to the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead of you or a collision
could occur.
1. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode
2. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
Push the MAIN switch jA to choose the
cruise control mode between j1 the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
and j2 the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode.
Always confirm the setting in the Intelligent Cruise Control system display.
For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, see the following description. For
the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, see page 5-33.
SELECTING THE
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE
To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode j1 , quickly push and release
the MAIN switch jA .
Once a control mode is activated, it cannot
be changed to the other cruise control
mode. To change the mode, push the MAIN
switch once to turn the system off. Then
push the MAIN switch again to turn the
SSD0375
Starting and driving 5-17
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
system back on and select the desired
cruise control mode.
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
system automatically maintains a selected
distance from the vehicle traveling in front
of you according to that vehicle’s speed (up
to the set speed), or at the set speed when
the road ahead is clear.
With ICC, the driver can maintain the same
speed as other vehicles without the constant need to adjust the set speed as you
would with a normal cruise control system. PRECAUTIONS ON
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE
The system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.
If the distance sensor jA detects a slower
moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle
follows the vehicle in front at the selected
distance.
The system automatically controls the
throttle and applies the brakes (up to 25%
of vehicle braking power) if necessary.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.
WARNING
O This system is only an aid to assist the
driver and is not a collision warning or
avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely
and be in control of the vehicle at all
times.
O The system is primarily intended for use
on straight, dry, open roads with light
traffic. It is not advisable to use the
system in city traffic or congested areas.
O This system will not adapt automatically
to road conditions. This system should
be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not
use the system on roads with sharp
curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in
fog.
SSD0376
5-18 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
The distance sensor will not detect under
most conditions:
O Stationary and slow moving vehicles
O Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
O Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
O Motorcycles traveling offset in the
travel lane
This system will not automatically brake
the vehicle to a stop.
WARNING
O As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely
on the Intelligent Cruise Control system.
This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving, or
overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or
other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake
pedal, depending on the distance to the
vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe
distance between vehicles.
O Although the brake operation is controlled by the system, the system does
not automatically stop the vehicle. If the
vehicle speed falls below approximately
20 MPH (32 km/h), the Intelligent Cruise
Control system is automatically canceled
and a warning chime sounds. (The brake
control is also canceled.)
O The system may not detect the vehicle in
front of you in certain road or weather
conditions. To avoid accidents, never use
the Intelligent Cruise Control system under the following conditions:
— On roads where the traffic is heavy or
there are sharp curves
— On slippery road surfaces such as on
ice or snow, etc.
— During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,
etc.)
• When the windshield wiper is operated at the low speed (LO) or high
speed (HI) position, the Intelligent Cruise Control system is
automatically canceled.
• When the rain-sensing auto
wipers/speed sensing auto wiper
system is operated in the INT position, and the wiper’s operation
speed is at least the same speed as
the LO (low speed) position, the ICC
system will be automatically canceled.
— When strong light (for example, at
sunrise or sunset) is directly shining
on the front of the vehicle.
— When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the
system sensor.
— On steep downhill roads (the vehicle
may go beyond the set vehicle speed
and frequent braking may result in
overheating the brakes).
— On repeated uphill and downhill
roads.
— When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between
vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration.
Starting and driving 5-19
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
O Do not use the Intelligent Cruise Control
system if you are towing a trailer. The
system may not detect a vehicle ahead.
O In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come
into the sensor detection zone and cause
automatic braking. You may need to control the distance from other vehicles
using the accelerator pedal. Always stay
alert and avoid using the ICC system
when it is not recommended in this section.
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
MODE OPERATION
Always pay attention to the operation of
the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode of
the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
may not be able to maintain the selected
distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under
some circumstances.
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode uses a sensor jA located on the front
of the vehicle to detect vehicles traveling
ahead. The sensor generally detects the
signals returned from the reflectors on a
vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflector on the vehicle
ahead, the ICC system may not maintain
the selected distance.
The following are some conditions in which
the sensor cannot detect the signals:
O When the reflector of the vehicle ahead
is positioned high on the vehicle
(trailer, etc.).
O When the reflector on the vehicle ahead
is missing, damaged or covered.
O When the reflector of the vehicle ahead
is covered with dirt, snow and road
spray.
O When the snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s visibility.
O When dense exhaust or other smoke
(black smoke) from vehicles reduces
the sensor’s visibility.
O When excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of
your vehicle.
SSD0376
5-20 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
O When your vehicle is towing a trailer,
etc.
The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor’s operation. When
the sensor is covered with dirt or obstructs,
the system will automatically be canceled.
If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the
ICC system may not detect them. In these
instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode may not cancel and may not
be able to maintain the selected following
distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to
check and clean the sensor regularly.
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode is designed to maintain a selected
distance and reduce the speed to match
the slower vehicle ahead; the system will
decelerate the vehicle as necessary. However, the ICC system can only apply up to
25% of the vehicles total braking power.
This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle
speeds change gradually. If a vehicle
moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a
vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may
become closer because the ICC system
cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly
enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will
sound a warning chime and blink the
system display to notify the driver to take
necessary action.
The system will cancel and a warning
chime will sound if the speed falls below
approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h). The
system will also disengage below the 20
MPH (32 km/h) cut-off speed or over the
maximum set speed.
Refer to “Approach warning” later in this
section.
The following items are controlled when
the selector lever is in the D (Drive) position
and the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode is selected:
O When there are no vehicles traveling
ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode maintains the speed set
by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 25 and 90 MPH
(40 and 144 km/h).
O When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode adjusts the speed to maintain the
distance, selected by driver, from the
vehicle ahead. The adjusting speed
range is between approximately 20
MPH (32 km/h) and up to the set speed.
O When the vehicle traveling ahead has
moved out from its lane of travel, the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You
must pay attention to vehicle operation to
maintain proper distance from vehicles
ahead when approaching toll gates or
traffic congestion.
Starting and driving 5-21
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
The detection zone of the ICC sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within
the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may
not be detected in the same lane ahead if
they are traveling offset from the centerline
of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the
lane ahead may not be detected until the
vehicle has completely moved into the
lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may
warn you by blinking the system indicator
and sounding the chime. The driver may
have to manually control the proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead.
SSD0252
5-22 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
When driving on some roads, such as
winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or
roads which are under construction, the
ICC sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a
vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the
ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the
vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane,
etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs,
the ICC system may warn you by blinking
the system indicator and sounding the
chime unexpectedly. You will have to
manually control the proper distance away
from the vehicle traveling ahead.
When driving on the freeway at a set speed
and approaching a slower traveling vehicle
ahead, the ICC will adjust the speed to
maintain the distance, selected by the
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the
freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and
maintain the speed up to the set speed.
Pay attention to the driving operation to
maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs,
you will have to manually control
SSD0253 SSD0254
Starting and driving 5-23
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
the vehicle speed.
Intelligent cruise control switch
The system is operated by a MAIN switch
and four control switches, all mounted on
the steering wheel.
1. MAIN switch:
Master switch to activate the system
2. SET/COAST switch:
Sets desired cruise speed, reduces
speed incrementally.
3. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed
incrementally.
4. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without
erasing the set speed.
5. DISTANCE switch:
Changes the vehicle’s following distance:
O Maximum
O Intermediate
O Minimum
SSD0377
5-24 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Intelligent cruise control system
display
The display is located under the speedometer.
1. MAIN switch indicator light (White)
Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.
2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in
front of you.
3. Set distance indicator
Displays the selected distance between
vehicles set with the DISTANCE switch.
4. Indicates your vehicle
5. Intelligent Cruise Control system
warning light (Orange)
The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the ICC system.
6. Set vehicle speed indicator
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the display j1 comes on as illustrated to
check for a burned-out bulb, and it turns
off when the engine is started.
SSD0378 SSD0379
Starting and driving 5-25
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Operating vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode
To turn on the cruise control, quickly
push and release the MAIN switch jA on.
The cruise indicator light, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator
come on and in a standby state for setting.
CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ON/OFF switch
is off when not using the Intelligent Cruise
Control.
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the
SET/COAST switch and release it. (Vehicle
ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator
come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the
set speed.
The Intelligent Cruise Control system cannot be set under the following conditions
even if the SET/COAST switch is pushed.
O When traveling outside the 25 to 90
MPH (40 to 144 km/h) speed range
SSD0380 SSD0381
5-26 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O When the selector lever is not in the D
(Drive) position, including the manual
shift mode.
O While the brakes are applied by the
driver
O When pushing the RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch without a set speed
in memory
O When the windshield wipers are operating
O When the rain sensing auto
wipers/speed sensing auto wiper
system is operated in the INT position,
and the wiper’s operation is at least the
same as the LO (low speed) position.
O When the parking brake is applied.
O When the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system is switched off.
1. System set display with vehicle ahead
2. System set display without vehicle
ahead
System operation
WARNING
Normally when controlling the distance to a
vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. When deceleration
is required to maintain a safe distance to the
vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if
a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when
using the ICC system.
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed
based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed,
similar to standard cruise control, as long
SSD0382
Starting and driving 5-27
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead.
The ICC system displays the set speed.
Vehicle detected ahead:
When a vehicle is detected in the lane
ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a
slower vehicle ahead. The system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed
of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver
selected distance.
The stoplights of the vehicle come on and
the brake pedal depresses when braking is
performed by the ICC system.
CAUTION
Never place your foot under the brake pedal
when the brake is operated by the Intelligent
Cruise Control system. You may get your foot
caught in the pedal.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on.
The ICC system will also display the set
speed and selected distance.
Vehicle ahead not detected:
When a vehicle is no longer detected
ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously
set vehicle speed. The ICC system then
maintains the set speed.
When a vehicle is no longer detected the
vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.
If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the
ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle.
When passing another vehicle, the set
speed indicator will flash when the vehicle
speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle
detect indicator will turn off when the area
ahead of the vehicle is open. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to
the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in
the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.
SSD0383
5-28 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
How to change the set vehicle
speed
To cancel the preset speed, use any of
these methods:
O Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
O Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.
O Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the
ON/OFF switch indicator and set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:
O Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the SET/COAST
switch.
O Push and hold the RESUME/
ACCELERATE switch. The set vehicle
speed will increase by approximately
5 MPH (5 km/h for Canada).
O Push, then quickly release the
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 MPH (1
km/h for Canada).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:
O Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed,
push the SET/COAST switch and release it.
O Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.
The set vehicle speed will decrease by
approximately 5 MPH (5 km/h for
Canada).
O Push, then quickly release the
SET/COAST switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will decrease by
approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h for
Canada).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.
The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over
25 MPH (40 km/h).
How to change the set distance to
the vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be
selected at any time depending on the
traffic conditions.
Each time the DISTANCE switch jA is
pushed, the set distance will change to
long, medium, short and back to long
again in that sequence.
SSD0384
Starting and driving 5-29
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O The distance to the vehicle ahead will
change according to the vehicle speed.
The higher the vehicle speed, the
longer the distance.
O If the engine is stopped, the set distance becomes “long”. (Each time the
engine is started, the initial setting becomes “long”.)
Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the
system warns the driver with the chime and
ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe
vehicle distance if:
• The chime sounds.
• The vehicle ahead detection and set
distance indicator blink.
The warning chime may not sound in some
cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:
O When the vehicles are traveling at the
same speed and the distance between
vehicles is not changing.
O When the vehicle ahead is traveling
faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing.
O When the accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.
O When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
The warning chime will not sound when
your vehicle approaches vehicles that are
parked or moving slowly.
SSD0385
5-30 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound
and the system display may blink when
the ICC sensor detects some reflectors jA
which are fitted on vehicles in other lanes
or on the side of the road. This may cause
the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate
the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect
these reflectors when the vehicle is driven
on winding roads, hilly roads or when entering or exiting a curve. The ICC sensor
may also detect reflectors on narrow roads
or in road construction zones. In these
cases you will have to manually control the
proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected
by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or
driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is
being driven with some damage).
Automatic cancellation
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled.
O When the vehicle speed falls below approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h)
O When the selector lever is shifted to a
position other than D (Drive), including
the manual shift mode
O When the windshield wipers are operated.
O When the rain-sensing autowipers/speed sensing auto wiper
system is operated in the INT position,
and the wiper’s operation is at least the
same speed as the LO (low speed) position.
O When the parking brake is applied
O When the VDC is turned off
O When the VDC operates
Warning light and display
Condition A
The chime sounds and the Intelligent
Cruise Control system is canceled automatically in the conditions described
below. Part of the system display will come
on or blink, making it impossible to set.
O When the VDC is turned off.
O When the VDC operates
O When a tire slips
SSD0284A SSD0386
Starting and driving 5-31
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
O When strong light (sunlight, etc.) is directly shining on the front of the vehicle
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, turn the system off using
the Intelligent Cruise Control MAIN
Switch. Turn the ICC system back on to
use the system.
Condition B
When the sensor window is dirty, making
it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,
the ICC system is automatically canceled.
The chime sounds and the system
warning light (Orange) will come on and
the set distance indicators will blink.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the
vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine
off. Clean the sensor window with a soft
cloth and then perform the settings again.
Condition C
When the ICC system is not operating
properly, the chime sounds and the
system warning light (Orange) will come
on.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the
vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine
off, restart the engine, resume driving and
set the ICC system again.
If it is not possible to set the system or
the indicator stays on, it may indicate
that the system is malfunctioning. AlSSD0387 SSD0388
5-32 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
though the vehicle is still driveable under
normal conditions, have the vehicle
checked at an INFINITI dealer.
Sensor maintenance
The sensor for the ICC system jA is located
below the front bumper.
To keep the ICC system operating properly,
be sure to observe the following:
O Always keep the sensor clean.
Wipe with a soft cloth carefully so as
not to damage the sensor.
O Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor. Do not touch or remove the screw located on the sensor.
Doing so could cause failure or malfunction. If the sensor is damaged due
to an accident, contact an INFINITI
dealer.
O Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the sensor. To clean the
sensor, wipe gently with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent
and rinse with water. Dry the sensor
with a dry cloth.
O Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory
near the sensor. This could cause
failure or malfunction.
CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED)
CRUISE CONTROL MODE
This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING
O In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode, a warning chime does not
sound to warn you if you are too close to
the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.
SSD0376
Starting and driving 5-33
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
O Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead
of you or a collision could occur.
O Always confirm the setting in the Intelligent Cruise Control system display.
O Do not use the conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode when driving
under the following conditions:
• when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed.
• in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed.
• on winding or hilly roads.
• on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
• in very windy areas.
O Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode display and switch
The display is located under the speedometer.
1. MAIN switch:
Master switch to activate the system
2. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed
incrementally.
3. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing
the set speed.
4. SET/COAST switch:
Sets the desired cruise speed, reduces
speed incrementally.
5. MAIN switch indicator light
Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.
6. Cruise set switch indicator light
The light comes on while the vehicle
speed is controlled by the conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode of the
ICC system.
7. Cruise system warning light
The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the cruise control system.
SSD0389
5-34 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
Operating conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, push and hold the
MAIN switch jA for longer than about 1.5
seconds.
When pushing the MAIN switch on, the
Intelligent Cruise Control system display
and the CRUISE indicator light (White) in
the instrument cluster come on. After you
hold the MAIN switch on for longer than
about 1.5 seconds, the Intelligent Cruise
Control system display goes out. The
CRUISE indicator stays lit. You can now
set your desired cruising speed. Pushing
the MAIN switch again will turn the
system completely off.
When the ignition switch is turned off, the
system is also automatically turned off.
To use the Intelligent Cruise Control
again, quickly push and release the MAIN
switch (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode) or push and hold it (conventional
cruise control mode) again to turn it on.
CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ON/OFF switch
off when not using the Intelligent Cruise
Control.
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the
SET/COAST switch and release it. (The
SET indicator light will come on.) Take
your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your
vehicle will maintain the set speed.
O To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release
the pedal, the vehicle will return to
the previously set speed.
O The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep
hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.
To cancel the preset speed, use any of
the following methods:
a) Push the CANCEL button. The SET indicator light will go out.
b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator
light will go out.
c) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the
CRUISE indicator and SET indicator
lights will go out.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the SET/COAST
switch.
b) Push and hold the RESUME/
ACCELERATE set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
c) Push, then quickly release the
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
SSD0390
Starting and driving 5-35
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed,
push the SET/COAST switch and release it.
b) Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle
slows down to the desired speed.
c) Push, then quickly release the
SET/COAST switch. Each time you do
this, the set speed will decrease by
about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.
The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over
25 MPH (40 km/h).
Automatic cancellation
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically
canceled.
O When the vehicle slows down more
than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set
speed.
O When the vehicle speed falls below
approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h).
O When the selector lever is shifted to a
position other than D (Drive), including
the manual shift mode.
O When the parking brake is applied.
O When the VDC operates (except ABS,
which is functional with ICC system
operation).
Warning light
When the system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the system
warning light (Orange) will come on.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the
vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine
off, restart the engine, resume driving and
then perform the setting again.
If it is not possible to set or the indicator
stays on, it may indicate that the system
is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is
still driveable under normal conditions,
SSD0388
5-36 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI
dealer.
PREVIEW FUNCTION (for Intelligent
Cruise Control system equipped
models)
The ICC system with the preview function
identifies the need to apply emergency
braking by sensing the vehicle ahead in the
same lane and the distance to the vehicle
ahead and relative speed from it, it applies
the brake pre-pressure before the driver
depresses the brake pedal and helps improve brake response by reducing pedal
free play.
For more details, refer to “Brake assist”
later in this section.
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and ensure
the future reliability and economy of your
new vehicle.
Failure to follow these recommendations
may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
O Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not
run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
O Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
O Avoid quick starts.
O Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
O Do not tow a trailer for the first 500
miles (805 km).
O Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position.
O Drive at moderate speeds on the
highway.
O Avoid unnecessary stopping and
braking. Keep a safe distance behind
other vehicles.
O Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.
O Avoid unnecessary prolonged engine
idling.
O Keep your engine tuned up.
O Follow the recommended periodic
maintenance schedule.
O Keep the tires inflated at the correct
pressure. Improper tire pressure will
increase wear and waste fuel.
O Make sure the front wheels are properly
aligned. Improper alignment will cause
premature tire wear and lower fuel
economy.
O Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only
when necessary.
O When cruising at highway speeds, it is
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
Starting and driving 5-37
Z 04.11.29/F50-D X
more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to
reduce drag.
WARNING
O Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
O Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
O Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
O Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park).
Failure to do so could cause the vehicle
to move unexpectedly or roll away and
result in an accident.
O Make sure the shift lever has been
pushed as far forward as it can go and
cannot be moved without depressing
the foot brake pedal.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
SD1006MA
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
5-38 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from
rolling into the street when parked on
a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
O HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: j1
Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
O HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: j2
Turn the wheels away from the curb
and move the vehicle back until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
O HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB: j3
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away
from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”
position and remove the key.
The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
If the engine stops or the drive belt
breaks, you will still have control of the
vehicle. However, much greater steering
effort is needed, especially in sharp turns
or at low speeds.
WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
steering will not work. Steering will be
much harder to operate.
The active damper suspension controls
damping force and helps minimize the
movement of the vehicle body. It helps
stable driving when the vehicle moves up
and down on large rolling roads or when
the vehicle body leans during cornering
with a high centrifugal force.
The damping force of the shock absorbers
can be adjusted to the level you desire.
Set the switch to the position you desire
while the ignition switch is ON.
Set the switch to the AUTO position for
normal driving. The damping force will automatically adjust according to the road
surface and driving conditions.
Set the switch to the SPORT position
when you desire a firm feeling all the
time.
In the event of an electrical system
failure, a signal stored in the system’s
computer memory is automatically sent to
the active damper suspension control unit
and the actuators. The shock absorbers
now function as they would on a vehicle
not equipped with the active damper suspension function. Contact an INFINITI
dealer for service.
POWER STEERING ACTIVE DAMPER SUSPENSION
Starting and driving 5-39
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,
you will still have braking at two wheels.
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you
can stop the vehicle by depressing the
brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to
stop the vehicle and the stopping distance
will be longer.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven
through water, the brakes may get wet. As
a result, your braking distance will be
longer and the vehicle may pull to one side
during braking.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly tapping the brake pedal
to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the
brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the
vehicle at high speeds until the brakes
function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking
brake is weakened or whenever the
parking brake shoes and/or drums/rotors
are replaced, in order to assure the best
braking performance.
This procedure is described in the Vehicle
service manual and can be performed by
your INFINITI dealer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This will cause overheating
of the brakes, wearing out the brake and
pads faster and reduce gas mileage.
To help save the brakes and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed
and downshift to a lower gear before going
down a slope or long grade. Overheated
brakes may reduce braking performance
and could result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
O While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid
and result in an accident.
O If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for the
brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.
BRAKE SYSTEM
5-40 Starting and driving
Z 04.11.23/F50-D X
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist
is activated generating greater braking
force than a conventional brake booster
even with light pedal force.
WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely
and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
PREVIEW FUNCTION (Intelligent
Cruise Control system equipped
model)
When the Preview Function identifies the
need to apply emergency braking by
sensing a vehicle ahead in the same lane
and the distance and relative speed from
it, it applies the brake pre-pressure before the driver depresses the brake pedal
and helps improve brake response by reducing pedal free play.
O This system will not operate when the
vehicle is moving at approximately 20
MPH (32 km/h) or less.
O The pre-pressure function ceases
when the following conditions are
met:
a) When the driver depresses the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
b) If the driver does not operate the accelerator or brake pedal within approximately 1 second.
O The sensor will not detect:
a) Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
b) Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
c) Motorcycles traveling offset in the
travel lane as illustrated
WARNING
O This system is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the
SSD0338
BRAKE ASSIST
Starting and driving 5-41
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
driver’s responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
O As there is a performance limit to the
Preview Function, never rely solely on
this system. This system does not correct careless inattentive or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad
weather. Reduce vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, in order to
maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
O The system may not detect the vehicle
in front of you in certain road or
weather conditions. The Preview Function may not operate properly under
the following conditions. The vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions
and the Brake Assist will operate.
— When rain, snow or dirt adhere to
the system sensor.
— When strong light (for example, at
sunrise or sunset) is directly shining on
the front of the vehicle.
— Winding or hilly roads may cause
the sensor to temporarily not detect a
vehicle in the same lane or may detect
objects or vehicles in other lanes.
— Vehicle position in the lane may
cause the sensor to temporarily not detect a vehicle in the same lane or may
detect objects or vehicles in other
lanes.
O When the Preview Function operates,
the brake pedal may move slightly and
may make a small noise. This is not a
system malfunction.
Warning light and display
When the Preview Function is not operating properly, the buzzer sounds and the
system warning light (Orange) will come
on.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the
vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine
off, restart the engine and resume driving.
If the indicator stays on, it may indicate
that the Preview Function is malfunctioning (the brake is operative). Although
the Vehicle is still driveable under normal
SSD0388
5-42 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
conditions, have the vehicle checked at
an INFINITI dealer.
How to handle the sensor
The sensor for the Preview Function is
common with Intelligent Cruise Control
and is located below the front bumper.
To keep the Preview Function operating
properly, be sure to observe the following:
O Always keep the sensor clean.
Wipe with a soft cloth carefully so as
not to damage them.
O Do not impact the areas around the
sensor. Do not touch or disassemble
the screw located on the sensor.
Doing so could cause failure or malfunction. If the sensor installation part
is deformed due to an accident, contact an INFINITI dealer.
O Do not attach a sticker (including
transparent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could
cause failure or malfunction.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system controls the
brakes so the wheels will not lock when
braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the
brake fluid pressure to prevent each
wheel from locking. By preventing wheel
lockup, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery
surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it
down.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping distances.
Normal operation
The anti-lock brake system will not operate at speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to
10 km/h). The speeds will vary according
to road conditions. When the anti-lock
system senses that one or more wheels
are close to locking up, the actuator (under the hood) rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure (like pumping
the brakes very quickly). While the actuator is working, you may feel a pulsation in
the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from the actuator under the hood.
This is normal and indicates that the antilock system is working properly. However,
the ABS operation may indicate that road
conditions are hazardous and extra care
is required while driving.
Self-test feature
The anti-lock brake system consists of
electronic sensors, electric pumps, and
hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each
time you start the engine and move the
vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may
hear a clank noise and/or feel a pulsation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and is
not an indication of any malfunction. If
the computer senses any malfunction, it
switches the anti-lock brake system OFF
and turns on the ABS brake warning light
in the instrument panel. The brake system
will then behave normally, but without
anti-lock assistance.
If the light comes on during the self-test,
or while you are driving, you should take
your vehicle to your INFINITI dealer for
Starting and driving 5-43
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
repair at your earliest convenience.
WARNING
The anti-lock brake system is a sophisticated
device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces, but
remember that the stopping distance on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with the anti-lock system.
Stopping distances may also be longer on
rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if
you are using tire chains. Tire type and condition of tires may also affect braking effectiveness. Always maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the responsibility for safety of self and others rests
in the hands of the driver.
O When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.
O When installing a spare tire, make sure it
is the proper size and type as specified
on the Tire and Loading Information label. See “9. Technical and consumer information” section of this
manual.
When accelerating or driving on a slippery
surface, the tires may spin or slide. With
the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system,
sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help
improve vehicle stability.
O When the VDC system is operating, the
“SLIP” indicator in the instrument
panel blinks.
O When only the Traction Control System
(TCS) portion of the VDC system is operating, the “SLIP” indicator in the instrument panel blinks.
O If the “SLIP” indicator blinks, the road
conditions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these
conditions. Be sure to drive carefully.
See “SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT”, and “VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
O Indicator light
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
the “SLIP” and “VDC OFF” indicator
lights illuminate in the instrument
panel. As long as these warning lights
are illuminated, the VDC system function is canceled.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
5-44 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
The VDC system uses an Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) function to improve vehicle
traction. The ABLS system works when one
of the driving wheels is spinning on a slippery surface. The ABLS system brakes the
spinning wheel, which distributes the
driving power to the other drive wheel. If
the vehicle is operated with the VDC
system turned off, all VDC system and TCS
functions will be turned off. The ABLS
system and ABS will still operate with the
VDC system off. If the ABLS system or ABS
is activated, the “SLIP” indicator light will
blink and you may hear a clunk noise
and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.
This is normal and is not an indication of a
malfunction.
While the VDC system is operating, you
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and
hear a noise or feel a vibration from under
the hood. This is normal and indicates that
the VDC system is working properly.
The VDC system computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each
time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed forward or backward.
When the self-test occurs, you may hear a
“clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the
brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
O The VDC system is designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or due to careless
or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce
vehicle speed and be especially careful
when driving and cornering on slippery
surfaces and always drive carefully.
O If engine related parts such as muffler
are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate.
O Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars
and bushings are not INFINITI approved
or are extremely deteriorated the VDC
system may not operate properly. This
could adversely affect vehicle handling
performance, and the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate.
O If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP”
indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate.
O When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the
VDC system may not operate properly
and the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP”
indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of
roads.
O When driving on unstable surfaces such
as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp,
the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart
the engine after driving onto a stable
surface.
O If wheels or tires other than those recommended are used, the VDC system
may not operate properly and “VDC OFF”
indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indicator lights may illuminate.
Starting and driving 5-45
Z 04.4.28/F50-D X
O The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing,
apply de-icer or glycerin to it through the
key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat
the key before inserting it into the key
hole.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that
the temperature will drop below 32°F
(0°C), check antifreeze to assure proper
winter protection. For additional information, see “Engine cooling system” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the
battery fluid may freeze and damage the
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,
the battery should be checked regularly.
For additional information, see “Battery”
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
antifreeze, drain the cooling system by
opening the drain plug located under the
radiator. Refill before operating the vehicle. See “Engine cooling system” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine coolant.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance
of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If
you operate your vehicle on snowy or
icy roads, INFINITI recommends the
use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON
tires on all four wheels. Please consult
your INFINITI dealer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some provinces and states prohibit
their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded
tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may
be poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
3. Tire chains may be used if desired.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
5-46 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Make sure they are of proper size for
the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer’s suggestions.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws
before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of
proper size for the tires on your vehicle
and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used
on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle
clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S”
chains are designed to meet the SAE
standard minimum clearances between
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction
device (tire chains or cables). The
minimum clearances are determined
using the factory equipped tire size. Other
types may damage your vehicle. Use
chain tensioners when recommended by
the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage
to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when
using tire chains. In addition, drive at a
reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle
may be damaged and/or vehicle handling
and performance may be adversely affected.
Never install tire chains on a T-type spare
tire. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following
items be carried in the vehicle during
winter:
1. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to
remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.
2. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
3. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of
snow- drifts.
4. Extra window washer fluid to refill the
reservoir tank.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
O Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.
O Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting
too fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.
O Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
O Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
O Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch
of ice is seen ahead, brake before
reaching it. Try not to brake while on
the ice, and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
O Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
Starting and driving 5-47
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
An engine block heater to assist extreme
cold temperature starting is available
through your INFINITI dealer.
WARNING
Do not use your heater with an ungrounded
electrical system or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters. You can be injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded
connection.
5-48 Starting and driving
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
6 In case of emergency
Roadside assistance program........................... 6-2
Flat tire ............................................................ 6-2
Low tire pressure warning system............... 6-2
Run-flat tires (if so equipped) ..................... 6-3
Changing a flat tire ..................................... 6-3
Jump starting.................................................... 6-9
Push starting.................................................. 6-12
If your vehicle overheats................................ 6-12
Towing your vehicle........................................ 6-13
Towing recommended by INFINITI............ 6-14
Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck
vehicle) ..................................................... 6-15
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Every new INFINITI comes with a 4 year,
unlimited mileage Roadside Assistance
plan. In the event of a roadside
emergency, Roadside Assistance Service
is available to you. Please refer to your
Warranty Information Booklet (U.S.) or
Warranty & Roadside assistance
information booklet (Canada) for details.
Both the Warranty Information Booklet
and Roadside Assistance Calling Card in
your Owner’s Literature Portfolio provide
the Toll-Free Number to call for assistance.
Roadside Assistance is provided 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year, for 4 years from
the date sold to give emergency roadside
help, in the event of mechanical or
nonmechanical trouble(s) such as flat
tires, out-of-gas, dead battery, lost keys,
mechanical breakdown, accident, etc.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING
SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with the low tire
pressure warning system. It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
When the tire pressure warning light is lit,
one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. If equipped, the system
also displays pressure of all tires (except
the spare tire) on the display screen by
sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with a very low tire pressure
(lower than 27 psi, 190 kPa), the low tire
pressure warning system will activate and
warn you of it by the low tire pressure
warning light or a WARNING (FLAT TIRE)
displayed on the screen. This system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). For
more details, please refer to
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “2. Instruments and controls” section, “Tire pressure information”
in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio and
voice-activated control systems” section
and “Low tire pressure warning system”
in the “5. Starting and driving” section.
WARNING
O If the low tire pressure warning light
comes on or a WARNING is displayed
on the monitor screen while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury. Check
the pressure of all four tires. Adjust the
pressure to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label to turn the
low tire pressure warning light OFF. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible.
O If your vehicle is equipped with run-flat
tires, you can continue driving after you
have a flat tire. However, remember
that vehicle handling stability is reduced, which could lead to an accident
and personal injury. See “Wheels and
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM FLAT TIRE
6-2 In case of emergency
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
tires” in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section for more details and
make sure to observe the cautions
about run-flat tires. Failure to do so
may result in a serious accident.
O When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not
be indicated and the low tire pressure
warning system will not function. Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
O Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
RUN-FLAT TIRES (if so equipped)
Run-flat tires are those tires that can be
used temporarily if they are punctured.
After driving to a safe location, replace
the punctured run-flat tire, following the
instructions later in “Changing a flat tire”.
For additional information, see “Wheels
and tires” in the “8. Maintenance and doit-yourself” section. Also, see the tire
safety information in the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.
WARNING
O Although you can continue driving with
a punctured run-flat tire, remember that
vehicle handling stability is reduced,
which could lead to an accident and
personal injury. Also, driving a long
distance at high speeds may damage
the tires.
O Do not drive at speeds above 55 MPH
(88 km/h) and do not drive more than
50 miles (80 km) with a punctured runflat tire. A punctured tire may burst and
cause a serious accident, resulting in
personal injury.
O Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid
hard cornering or braking, which may
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
O If a rear tire is punctured, replace it
with a non-punctured tire, especially
when driving on rainy snowy or icy
roads.
CAUTION
O Never install tire chains on a punctured
run-flat tire, as this could damage your
vehicle.
O Avoid driving over any projection or
pothole, as the clearance between the
vehicle and the ground is smaller than
normal.
O Do not enter an automated car wash
with a punctured run-flat tire.
O Have the punctured tire replaced by
your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible, as the tire’s performance capability is reduced.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below.
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road
and away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
In case of emergency 6-3
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. Shift the automatic
transmission into P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,
and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
O Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the automatic transmission is shifted into P (Park).
O Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
O Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.
O When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not
be indicated and the low tire pressure
warning system will not function. Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks j1 at both the front
and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
MCE0001A
6-4 In case of emergency
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Getting the spare tire and tools
Remove jacking tools and spare tire from
the storage area located inside the trunk
as illustrated.
Luggage board hook (if so equipped):
Remove the strap jA and hook the luggage board jB to the body as illustrated
while removing or storing the spare tire.
SCE0502 SCE0509
In case of emergency 6-5
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Removing wheel cap
To remove the wheel cap, use the jack rod
j1 as illustrated.
Apply the cloth j2 between the wheel cap
removal point jA and jack rod to prevent
damaging.
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result
in personal injury.
Jacking up the vehicle and
removing the damaged tire
WARNING
O Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
O Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle on
SCE0503 SCE0501 CE1089-A
Jack-up point
6-6 In case of emergency
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
other vehicles. The jack is designed for
lifting only your vehicle during a tire
change.
O Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for
jack support.
O Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
O Never use blocks on or under the jack.
O Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip differentials.
O Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following instructions.
1. Place the jack directly under the
jack-up point so that top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up
point. Align the center of both the jack
head and the notch at the jack-up
point as shown. Also fit the notched
portion of the vehicle in the groove of
the jack head as shown.
The jack should be used on level firm
ground.
2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two
turns by turning counterclockwise with
the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove
the wheel nuts until the tire is off the
ground.
3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire
clears the ground. To lift the vehicle,
securely hold the jack lever and rod
with both hands as shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.
SCE0504
In case of emergency 6-7
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. See specific instructions under the
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly until
they are tight.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated (j1 , j2 , j3 , j4 , j5 ). Lower the
vehicle completely.
WARNING
O Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
O Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the
nuts to become loose.
O Retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.). As soon as possible tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)
O Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure:
After the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar.
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD
tire pressure, the display of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pressure after the
vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km). This is because the tire pressurizes as the tire temperature rises. This
does not indicate a system malfunction.
SCE0039
6-8 In case of emergency
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking
equipment in the vehicle.
6. Place the spare tire cover and the
trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire.
7. Close the trunk.
WARNING
O Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly secured after use.
Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.
O The T-type spare tire and small size
spare tire are designed for emergency
use. See “Wheels and tires” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
If needed Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.
Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)
or Warranty Information Booklet
(Canada).
To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions
below must be followed.
WARNING
O If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
O Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
O Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which
can cause severe burns. If the fluid
should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted
area with water.
O Keep the battery out of the reach of
children.
O The booster battery must be rated at
SCE0505
JUMP STARTING
In case of emergency 6-9
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.
O Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not
lean over the battery when jump
starting.
O Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
O Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.
Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)
or Warranty Information Booklet
(Canada).
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
SCE0507
SCE0506
6-10 In case of emergency
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
to the charging system and cause personal
injury.
1. Remove the battery cover as illustrated.
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle jA , position the two vehicles (jA
and jB ) to bring their batteries into
close proximity to each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to
touch.
3. Apply parking brake. Move the selector lever to P (Park). Switch off all
unnecessary electrical systems (light,
heater, air conditioner, etc.).
4. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with a
firmly wrung out moist cloth jC to reduce explosion hazard.
5. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated (j1 → j2 → j3
→ j4 ).
CAUTION
O Always connect positive (+) to positive
(+) and negative (−) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
O Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal.
6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
jA and let it run for a few minutes.
7. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle jA at about 2,000 rpm, and
start your engine of the jumped vehicle jB in the normal manner.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, turn the key off and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
8. After starting your engine, carefully
disconnect the negative cable and
then the positive cable (j4 → j3 →
j2 → j1 ).
9. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).
Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to
cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.
10.Put the battery cover on.
In case of emergency 6-11
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
CAUTION
Automatic transmission models cannot be
push started. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage.
If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.
Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)
or Warranty & Roadside assistance information booklet (Canada).
WARNING
O Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
O To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is still hot. When the radiator
cap is removed, pressurized hot water
will spurt out, possibly causing serious
injury.
O Do not open the hood if steam is
coming out.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated
by an extremely high temperature gauge
reading), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take
the following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,
apply the parking brake and move the
selector lever to P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner switch.
Open all the windows, move the
heater or air conditioner temperature
control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.
3. If engine overheating is caused by
climbing a long hill on a hot day, run
the engine at a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge indication returns to
normal.
4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
for steam or coolant escaping from the
radiator before opening the hood (If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off
the engine.). Do not open the hood
further until no steam or coolant can
be seen.
5. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.
6. Visually check drive belts for damage
or looseness. Also check if the cooling
fan is running. The radiator hoses and
radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the drive belt is
PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
6-12 In case of emergency
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
missing or loose, or the cooling fan
does not run, stop the engine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan
can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high.
7. After the engine cools down, check
the coolant level in the reservoir tank
with the engine running. Add coolant
to the reservoir tank if necessary.
Have your vehicle repaired at the
nearest INFINITI dealer.
If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.
Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)
or Warranty & Roadside assistance information booklet (Canada).
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations
for towing must be followed. Incorrect
towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available
from your INFINITI dealer. Local service
operators will generally be familiar with
the applicable laws and procedures for
towing. To assure proper towing and to
prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, INFINITI recommends that you
have a service operator tow your vehicle.
It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions.
WARNING
O Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
O Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
O When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and
power train are in working condition. If
any unit is damaged, dollies must be
used.
O Always attach safety chains before
towing.
For information about towing your vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to
“Flat towing” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section of this
manual.
If needed, Roadside Assistance is available. Please see your Warranty Information Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.
Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)
or Warranty & Roadside assistance information booklet (Canada).
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
In case of emergency 6-13
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
INFINITI
INFINITI recommends that your vehicle
be towed with the driving (rear) wheels
off the ground or place the vehicle on a
flat bed truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
O Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground
or four wheels on the ground (forward
or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the
transmission. If it is necessary to tow
the vehicle with the front wheels
raised, always use towing dollies under
the rear wheels.
O When towing rear wheel drive models
with the front wheels on the ground or
on towing dollies: Turn the ignition key
to the OFF position, and secure the
steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device.
Never secure the steering wheel by
turning the ignition key to the LOCK position. This may damage the steering
lock mechanism.
SCE0386 SCE0387A
6-14 In case of emergency
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
j1 Towing hook
j2 Tie down hook
Do not use this hook as a towing
hook
VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a
stuck vehicle)
WARNING
O Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
O Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
CAUTION
O Tow chains or cables must be attached
only to the vehicle recovery hooks or
main structural members of the vehicle.
Otherwise, the vehicle body will be
damaged.
O Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free
a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.
Never tow a vehicle using the vehicle
tie downs or recovery hooks.
O Always pull the cable straight out from
the front of the vehicle. Never pull on
the vehicle at an angle.
O Pulling devices should be routed so
they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems.
O Pull devices such as ropes or canvas
straps are not recommended for use in
vehicle towing or recovery.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow,
mud, etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
System.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left
to clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
O Shift back and forth between R (reverse) and D (drive).
SCE0508
In case of emergency 6-15
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
O Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D.
O Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55
km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional towing
service to remove the vehicle.
6-16 In case of emergency
Z 04.4.29/F50-D X
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior .............................................. 7-2
Washing...................................................... 7-2
Waxing........................................................ 7-2
Removing spots .......................................... 7-3
Underbody .................................................. 7-3
Glass .......................................................... 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels ............................... 7-3
Chrome parts .............................................. 7-3
Cleaning interior............................................... 7-4
Floor mats................................................... 7-4
Seat belts ................................................... 7-5
Rear sun shade (if so equipped) ................. 7-5
Corrosion protection......................................... 7-5
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion..................................................... 7-5
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion..................................................... 7-5
To protect your vehicle from corrosion ........ 7-6
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
In order to maintain the appearance of
your vehicle, it is important to take proper
care of it.
To protect the paint surface, wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
O after a rainfall to prevent possible
damage from acid rain
O after driving on coastal roads
O when contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface
O when dust or mud builds up on the
surface
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park
in a shady area or protect the vehicle with
a body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the
body cover.
WASHING
Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of
clean water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly
using a mild soap such as Nissan Car
Wash, or a general purpose dishwashing
liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never
hot) water. Rinse the vehicle again with
plenty of clean water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the
doors, hatches and hood are particularly
vulnerable to the effects of road salt.
Therefore, these areas must be regularly
cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes
in the lower edge of the door are open.
Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash
away road salt.
Avoid leaving water spots on the paint
surface by using a damp chamois to dry
the vehicle.
CAUTION
O Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
O Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot,
as the surface may become
water-spotted.
O Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing caked-on
dirt or other foreign substances so the
paint surface is not scratched or damaged.
WAXING
If you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a
wax specified for use over clear coats, such
as Nissan Liquid or Spray Wax, because
your INFINITI has been finished with the
finest paint and hard clear coats. Your
INFINITI dealer can assist you in choosing
the proper product.
O Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.
O Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.
O If the surface does not polish easily,
use a road tar remover and wax again.
Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint
CLEANING EXTERIOR
7-2 Appearance and care
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
finish may dull the finish or leave swirl
marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning
products are available at your INFINITI
dealer or automotive accessory stores.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in
winter, the underbody must be cleaned
regularly. This will prevent dirt and salt
from building up and causing underbody
and suspension corrosion. Before the
winter period and again in the spring, the
underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be
easier to clean if the high-mounted stop
light is removed first. To remove the highmounted stop light, see “8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself”.
Be careful when removing the highmounted stop light to reduce the risk of
damaging the high-mounted stop light
wires.
The high-mounted stop light must be
properly reinstalled before driving your
vehicle.
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is
normal for glass to become coated with a
film after the vehicle is parked in the hot
sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will
easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electrical
conductors, radio antenna elements or rear
window defogger elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
Wash regularly, especially during winter
months in areas where road salt is used.
Salt could discolor the wheel if not removed.
CHROME PARTS
Clean chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the
finish.
Appearance and care 7-3
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Occasionally remove loose dust from the
interior trim, plastic parts and seats using
a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the
vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean,
soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth.
Before using any fabric protector, read
the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Some fabric protectors contain chemicals
that may stain or bleach the seat material. Use a cloth dampened only with
water, to clean the meter and gauge lens.
CAUTION
O Never use benzine, thinner, or any
similar material.
O The leather seats should be regularly
coated with a leather wax like saddle
soap. Never use car wax.
O Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
O Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may
damage the lens cover.
FLOOR MATS
The use of genuine floor mats can extend
the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. No matter
what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats
should be maintained with regular
cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.
Floor mat positioning aid
This model includes front floor mat brackets to act as floor mat positioning aid.
INFINITI floor mats have been specially
designed for your vehicle model. The front
floor mats have grommet holes in them.
To install, simply position the mat by
placing the floor mat bracket through the
floor mat grommet hole while centering
the mat in the floor pan contour.
Periodically check to make certain that
the mats are properly positioned.
SAI0027A
CLEANING INTERIOR
7-4 Appearance and care
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
them with a sponge dampened in a mild
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since
these materials may severely weaken the
seat belt webbing.
REAR SUN SHADE (if so equipped)
Screen
To clean, fully extend the rear sun shade
screen and clean dust or dirt off using a
vacuum cleaner from the inside of the
compartment. See “Rear sun shade” in
the “2. Instruments and controls” section
for rear sun shade operation.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the screen while
cleaning.
Cover
Wipe the rear sun shade cover with a
clean, dry cloth.
CAUTION
Never use benzine, thinner or any other
neutral detergent as this may deform the
cover.
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
1. The accumulation of moistureretaining dirt and debris in body panel
sections, cavities, and other areas.
2. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic accidents.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
the vehicle body underside can accelerate
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry
completely inside the vehicle, and should
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of
high relative humidity, especially those
areas where the temperatures stay above
freezing where atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt is used.
CORROSION PROTECTION
Appearance and care 7-5
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate the
rate of corrosion to those parts which are
not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt
in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road
salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the
disintegration of paint surfaces.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
O Wash your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
O Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.
O Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumulation.
O Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash
with water as soon as possible.
CAUTION
O NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris
from the passenger compartment by
washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt
with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
O Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing
are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor
pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be
cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, consult your local INFINITI dealer.
7-6 Appearance and care
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirement................................. 8-2
General maintenance........................................ 8-2
Explanation of maintenance items............... 8-2
Maintenance precautions ................................. 8-5
Engine compartment check locations................ 8-7
Engine cooling system...................................... 8-9
Checking engine coolant level..................... 8-9
Changing engine coolant........................... 8-10
Engine oil ....................................................... 8-11
Checking engine oil level .......................... 8-11
Changing engine oil .................................. 8-12
Changing engine oil filter.......................... 8-13
Automatic transmission fluid .......................... 8-14
Power steering fluid ....................................... 8-14
Brake fluid ..................................................... 8-14
Window washer fluid ...................................... 8-15
Battery ........................................................... 8-16
Jump starting ............................................ 8-17
Drive belts...................................................... 8-17
Spark plugs.................................................... 8-18
Replacing spark plugs............................... 8-18
Air cleaner...................................................... 8-19
Windshield wiper blades ................................ 8-19
Cleaning.................................................... 8-19
Replacing .................................................. 8-20
Parking brake and brake pedal ...................... 8-21
Checking parking brake ............................ 8-21
Checking brake pedal ............................... 8-21
Brake booster ........................................... 8-22
Fuses ............................................................. 8-23
Engine compartment ................................. 8-23
Passenger compartment............................ 8-24
Electronic key battery replacement ................. 8-25
Lights............................................................. 8-26
Headlights ................................................ 8-27
Exterior and interior lights ........................ 8-28
Wheels and tires ............................................ 8-31
Tire pressure............................................. 8-31
Tire labeling.............................................. 8-34
Types of tires ............................................ 8-35
Tire chains ................................................ 8-37
Changing wheels and tires........................ 8-38
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Your new INFINITI has been designed to
have minimum maintenance requirements
with longer service intervals to save you
both time and money. However, some dayto-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your INFINITI’s fine mechanical condition, as well as its emission
and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make
sure that the specified maintenance, as
well as general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only
one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. You
are a vital link in the maintenance chain.
Scheduled maintenance:
For your convenience, both required and
optional scheduled maintenance items
are described and listed in your “INFINITI
Service and Maintenance Guide”. You
must refer to that guide to ensure that
necessary maintenance is performed on
your INFINITI at regular intervals.
General maintenance:
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal
day-to-day operation. They are essential
for proper vehicle operation. It is your
responsibility to perform these procedures
regularly as prescribed.
These checks or inspections can be done
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if
you prefer, your INFINITI dealer.
Where to go for service:
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
systems checked and serviced by an
INFINITI dealer.
INFINITI technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and indealership information systems. They are
completely qualified to work on INFINITI
vehicles before work begins.
You can be confident that your INFINITI
dealer’s service department performs the
best job to meet the maintenance
requirements on your vehicle — in a
reliable and economic way.
During the normal day-to-day operation of
the vehicle, general maintenance should
be performed regularly as prescribed in
this section. If you detect any unusual
sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to
check for the cause or have your INFINITI
dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify your INFINITI dealer if you
think that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, see “Maintenance precautions” later in this section.
EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE
ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “*” is found later in this section.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be performed from time to time, unless
otherwise specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that all
doors and the engine hood, operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges and latches if
necessary. Make sure that the secondary
latch keeps the hood from opening when
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or
other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
basis. Make sure that the headlights,
stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights,
and other lights are all operating properly
and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When
checking the tires, make sure no wheel
nuts are missing, and check for any loose
wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge
often and always prior to long distance
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in
all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for
damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the
vehicle should pull to either side while
driving on a straight and level road, or if
you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear,
there may be a need for wheel alignment.
If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing
may be needed.
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Information booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
regular basis. Check the windshield at
least every six months for cracks or other
damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing periodic maintenance,
cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the
pedal does not catch or require uneven
effort. Keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.
Automatic transmission P (Park) mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that
your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position
without applying any brakes.
Brake pedal*: Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure it has the proper
distance under it when depressed fully.
Check the brake booster function. Be sure
to keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
the vehicle to one side when applied.
Parking brake*: Check that the lever has
the proper travel and confirm that your
vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep
hill with only the parking brake applied.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (For example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate
properly and smoothly, and are installed
securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,
fraying, wear or damage.
Seats: Check seat position controls such
as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc.
to ensure they operate smoothly and that
all latches lock securely in every position.
Check that the head restraints move up
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
and down smoothly and that the locks (if so
equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering conditions, such as excessive free
play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that
all warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly
and in sufficient quantity when operating
the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly
and that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (For example, each
time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.
It should be between the MAX and MIN
lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe condition require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the
brake fluid level is between the MAX and
MIN lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt
is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after
parking the vehicle on a level spot and
turning off the engine. (Wait more than 15
minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan.)
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
loose supports, cracks or holes. If the
sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble and correct it. See
“Precautions when starting and driving” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section for exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
dripping from the air conditioner after use
is normal. If you should notice any leaks or
if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the
cause and have it corrected immediately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines:
Check the level when the fluid is cold and
the engine is turned off. Check the lines for
proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently
exposed to corrosive substances such as
those used on icy roads or to control
dust. It is very important to remove these
substances, otherwise rust will form on
the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and
around the exhaust system. At the end of
winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being
careful to clean those areas where mud
and dirt may accumulate. For additional
information, see “Cleaning exterior” in
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 05.2.25/F50-D X
the “7. Appearance and care” section.
Windshield washer fluid*: Check that
there is adequate fluid in the tank.
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take
care to prevent serious accidental injury
to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The
following are general precautions which
should be closely observed.
WARNING
O Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. Move the shift selector
lever to P (Park).
O Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
O If you must work with the engine
running, keep your hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from moving
fans, belts and any other moving
parts.
O It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
O Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
O If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
O Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support
it with safety stands.
O Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from fuel tank and the battery.
O The fuel filter or fuel lines should be
serviced by an INFINITI dealer because the fuel lines are under high
pressure even when the engine is
off.
CAUTION
O Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
wait until it cools down.
O Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition key is in the ON position.
O Never leave the engine or automatic
transmission related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
O Avoid direct contact with used engine
oil and coolant. Improperly disposed
engine oil, and coolant, and/or other
vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.
This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section gives instructions regarding only
those items which are relatively easy for
most owners to perform. A genuine
INFINITI Service Manual is also available.
See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual
order information” in the “9. Technical
and consumer information” section.
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions,
and could affect your warranty coverage.
If in doubt about any servicing, we recommend that it be done by your INFINITI
dealer.
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. Fuse cover
2. Battery cover
3. Air filter cover
Remove the cover using the suitable tools
as illustrated if necessary.
SDI1660
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. Fuse/fusible link holder
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Coolant reservoir
5. Battery
6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
7. Radiator filler cap
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Air cleaner
SDI1642
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a high-quality, year-round,
anti-freeze coolant solution. The antifreeze
solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional cooling system
additives are not necessary.
WARNING
O Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Wait until the engine and
radiator cool down. Serious burns could
be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See precautions in “If your vehicle overheats”
found in the “6. In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
O The radiator is equipped with a pressure
type radiator cap. To prevent engine
damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to
use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze Coolant (green) or equivalent with the
proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and
50% demineralized water/distilled water.
The use of other types of coolant solutions
may damage your engine cooling system.
Outside
temperature
down to
Antifreeze
Demineralized water or
distilled
water°C °F
−35 −30 50% 50%
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
tank when the engine is cold. If the coolant
level is below MIN j2 , open the reservoir
tank cap jA and add coolant up to the MAX
j1 level. If the reservoir tank is empty,
check the coolant level in the radiator
when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening
and also add it to the reservoir tank up to
the MAX level j1 .
If the cooling system requires coolant
SDI1643
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
Z 04.11.30/F50-D X
frequently, have it checked by your
INFINITI dealer.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
O Major cooling system repairs should
be performed by your INFINITI dealer.
The service procedures can be found
in the appropriate INFINITI Service
Manual.
O Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine
overheating.
WARNING
O To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
O Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator.
O Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
O Keep coolant out of reach of children
and pets.
When changing engine coolant, be sure
the ignition switch is off.
1. Remove the radiator drain plug cover
jA located under body and open the
SDI1644
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
radiator drain plug jB , and then remove the radiator filler cap jC .
O Be careful not to allow coolant to contact drive belts.
O Waste coolant must be disposed of
properly. Check your local regulations.
2. Close the radiator drain plug securely
after the coolant is drained.
3. Fill the radiator slowly with the proper
mixture of antifreeze solution and
demineralized water/distilled water.
Fill the reservoir tank up to the MAX
level. Then install the radiator filler
cap.
4. Start the engine and warm it up until
it reaches normal operating temperature. Then race the engine two or
three times under no load. Watch the
engine coolant temperature gauge for
signs of overheating.
5. Stop the engine. After it completely
cools down, refill the radiator up to
the filler opening. Fill the reservoir
tank up to the MAX level.
6. Check the drain plug for any sign of
leakage.
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than
15 minutes for the oil to drain back
into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick jA and wipe it
clean. Reinsert it all the way, so the
circle of the dipstick handle faces the
vehicle front.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be between the H
and L marks j1 . If the oil level is below
the L mark j2 , remove the oil filler cap
and pour recommended oil through the
opening. Do not overfill j3 .
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the breakin period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount
of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
SDI1645
ENGINE OIL
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
Change the engine oil and filter according
to the maintenance intervals shown in the
“INFINITI Service and Maintenance
Guide”.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. (Approximately 5
minutes)
3. Turn the engine off and wait more
than 15 minutes.
4. Place a large drain pan under the
drain plug.
5. Open the cover jA (located under the
body) as illustrated and remove the
drain plug jB with a wrench.
6. Remove the oil filler cap jC and completely drain the oil.
If oil filter is to be changed, remove
and replace it at this time. See later in
“Engine oil” for changing engine oil
filter.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
O Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
O Check your local regulations.
7. Clean and re-install the drain plug
with a new washer. Securely tighten
the drain plug with a wrench.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 Nzm)
Do not use excessive force.
8. Refill the engine with recommended
oil and install the cap securely.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical
and consumer information” section for
drain and refill capacity.
The drain and refill capacity depends
on the oil temperature and drain time.
Use these specifications for reference
only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is
in the engine.
9. Start the engine.
Check for leakage around the drain
plug. Correct as required.
10.Turn the engine off and wait more
than 15 minutes. Check the oil level.
Add engine oil if necessary.
11.Dispose of waste oil properly.
SDI1646
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
WARNING
O Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
O Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
O Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off and wait more
than 15 minutes.
3. Open the cover (located under the
body) as illustrated jA .
4. Loosen the oil filter jB with an oil
filter wrench. Remove the oil filter by
turning it by hand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting
surface with a clean rag.
Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket remaining on the mounting surface
of the engine.
6. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.
7. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
10.85 to 15.19 ft-lb
(14.7 to 20.6 Nzm)
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more
than 15 minutes. Check the oil level.
Add engine oil if necessary.
10.Close the cover.
SDI1647
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
When checking or replacement is required,
we recommend your INFINITI dealer for
servicing.
CAUTION
O Use only Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF. Do
not mix with other fluids.
O Using automatic transmission fluid other
than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will
cause deterioration in driveability and
automatic transmission durability, and
may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
The specified automatic transmission fluid
is also described on caution labels located
in the engine compartment.
When checking or replacement is required,
we recommend your INFINITI dealer for
servicing.
CAUTION
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF
or equivalent.
For additional brake fluid specification information, refer to “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of this
manual.
WARNING
Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system.
The use of improper fluids can damage the
brake system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces.
This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled,
immediately wash the surfaces with water.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.11.30/F50-D X
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
fluid is below the MIN line j2 or the brake
warning light comes on, add Genuine
Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line
j1 . If fluid must be added frequently, the
system should be checked by your
INFINITI dealer.
Add fluid when the low washer fluid
warning comes on the display. Pull up the
reservoir tank cap jA and add a washer solvent to the water for better cleaning. In the
winter season, add a windshield washer
antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze Fluid or equivalent.
WARNING
Antifreeze is poisonous and should be stored
carefully in marked containers out of the
reach of children.
CAUTION
Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant
for window washer solution. This may result
in damage to the paint.SDI1648 SDI1592A
WINDOW WASHER FLUID
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
Z 04.11.30/F50-D X
O Keep the battery surface clean and
dry. Any corrosion should be washed
off with a solution of baking soda and
water.
O Make certain the terminal connections
are clean and securely tightened.
O If the vehicle is not to be used for 30
days or longer, disconnect the negative (—) battery terminal cable to prevent discharging it.
WARNING
O Do not expose the battery to flames or
electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After
touching a battery or battery cap, do
not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15
minutes and seek medical attention.
O Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid
can cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
O When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
O Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
O Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove
the battery cover if it is necessary). It
should be between the UPPER LEVEL j1
and LOWER LEVEL j2 lines.
If it is necessary to add fluid, add only
distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill.
DI0137MA
BATTERY
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. Remove the cell plugs jA .
2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER
LEVEL j1 line.
If the side of the battery is not clear,
check the distilled water level by looking
directly above the cell, as illustrated.
3. Tighten cell plugs jA .
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump
starting” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section. If the engine does not start by
jump starting, the battery may have to be
replaced. Contact your INFINITI dealer.
1. Water pump
2. Generator
3. Crankshaft pulley
4. Power steering fluid pump
5. Air conditioner compressor
SDI1480 SDI1411
DRIVE BELTS
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
WARNING
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
LOCK position. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of
unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or
loose, have it replaced or adjusted by
your INFINITI dealer.
2. Have the belts checked regularly for
condition in accordance with the maintenance schedule in your “INFINITI
Service and Maintenance Guide”.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove
the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can
damage the spark plugs.
Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
If replacement is required, see your
INFINITI dealer for servicing.
Platinum-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace the
platinum- tipped jA spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark
plugs since they will last much longer.
Follow the maintenance schedule in
“INFINITI Service and Maintenance
Guide”, but do not reuse them by
cleaning or regapping.
SDI0145C
SPARK PLUGS
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Remove the retainers j1 as illustrated
and pull out j2 the filter element.
The filter element should not be cleaned
and reused. Replace it according to the
maintenance intervals. See “INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide” booklet for
maintenance intervals. When replacing
the filter, wipe the inside of the air
cleaner housing and the cover with a
damp cloth.
WARNING
O Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops flame if the
engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air
cleaner removed, and be careful when
working on the engine with the air
cleaner removed.
O Never pour fuel into the throttle body
or attempt to start the engine with the
air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form
when rinsing with clear water.
Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear
water. If your windshield is still not clear
after cleaning the blades and using the
wiper, replace the blades.
SDI1247A
AIR CLEANER WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and the windshield wiper switch
ON. Turn the ignition switch OFF when
the wiper is in the fully up position.
The wiper will stop as illustrated.
The wiper should be in the fully up position to avoid scratching the engine hood
or wiper arm.
2. Pull the wiper arm.
3. Push the release tab jA , and then
move the wiper blade down the wiper
arm j1 while pushing the release tab
to remove.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until a click sounds.
CAUTION
O After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
O Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure.
O Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.
SDI1248A SDI1649
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
If you wax the surface of the hood, be
careful not to let wax get into the washer
nozzle jA . This may cause clogging or
improper windshield washer operation. If
wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a
needle or small pin jB .
CHECKING PARKING BRAKE
From the released position, depress the
parking brake pedal slowly and firmly,
and check the notches between the initial
and final position of the pedal jA . If it is
out of the range, see your INFINITI
dealer.
Range: 4 to 5 notches under a depressing
force of 44 lb (196 N).
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL
With the engine running, check the distance between the upper surface of the
pedal and the metal floor jA . If it is out of
the range shown above, see your
INFINITI dealer.
Range: 4 inch (100 mm) or more under a
depressing force of 110 lb (490
N).
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with selfadjusting brakes.
SDI1249A
SDI1391F DI1020MO
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE PEDAL
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every
time the brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
See an INFINITI dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake
pad requires replacement, it will make a
high pitched scraping or screeching
sound when the vehicle is in motion
whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is
normal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system.
The rear drum parking brakes do not have
audible wear indicators. Should you ever
hear an unusually loud noise from the
rear drum parking brakes, have them inspected as soon as possible by your
INFINITI dealer.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information,
see the maintenance log section of your
“INFINITI Service and Maintenance
Guide” booklet for maintenance intervals.
BRAKE BOOSTER
Check the brake booster function as follows:
1. With the engine off, press and release
the brake pedal several times. When
brake pedal movement (distance of
travel) remains the same from one
pedal application to the next, continue
on to the next step.
2. While depressing the brake pedal, start
the engine. The pedal height should
drop a little.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds, the
pedal height should not change.
4. Run the engine for 1 minute without
depressing the brake pedal, then turn
it off. Depress the brake pedal several
times. The pedal travel distance will
decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is released from
the booster.
If the brakes do not operate properly, see
your INFINITI dealer.
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse
box cover. This could damage the electrical
system or cause a fire.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Remove the fuse jA with the fuse
puller located in the passenger compartment fuse box.
5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a
new fuse.
6. If a new fuse opens again, have the
electrical system checked and repaired by your INFINITI dealer.
SDI1650
FUSES
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition,
check the fusible links jA . If any of these
fusible links are melted, replace only with
genuine parts. See your INFINITI dealer.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. To open the fuse box cover, push jA
toward the front and remove.
3. Pinch the fuse perpendicularly with
the fuse puller jB and pull it out jD .
4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a
new (spare jC ) fuse.
5. If a new fuse opens again, have the
electrical system checked and repaired by your INFINITI dealer.
SDI1651 SDI1652
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Replace the battery as follows:
1. Remove the emergency key and the
screw from the electronic key.
2. Remove the outer case jA .
3. Open the inner case using a suitable
tool.
4. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or
equivalent
Make sure that the ! side faces the bottom of the case.
5. Close the inner case securely.
6. Assemble the outer case.
7. Push the key button two or three
times to check its operation.
See your INFINITI dealer if you need any
assistance for replacement.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5
above.
O An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
O The electronic key is water-proof;
however, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
SDI1653
ELECTRONIC KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. Headlight, clearance, front turn signal
and side marker light
2. Front personal light
3. Rear personal light
4. Side turn signal light
5. Step light
6. Trunk light
7. High-mounted stop light
8. License plate light
9. Rear combination light (Back-up, turn
signal and tail/stop/side marker)
SDI1654
LIGHTS
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
HEADLIGHTS
Replacing the xenon headlight
bulb (low-beam)
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric
shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at an INFINITI dealer. For
additional information, see “Headlight and
turn signal switch” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section.
If replacement is required, see an
INFINITI dealer.
Replacing the halogen headlight
bulb (high-beam)
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type
which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. If replacement is required, see
your INFINITI dealer for servicing.
CAUTION
O High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the bulb. The bulb may break if
the glass envelope is scratched or the
bulb is dropped.
O Only touch the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass
envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance.
O Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed:
Wattage 60
Bulb no. HB3
O Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight reflector for a long period of time
as dust, moisture, and smoke may
enter the headlight body and affect the
performance of the headlight.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your INFINITI dealer.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.
Front turn signal light* 21 WY21W
Front fog light* 51 HB4
Clearance light* 5 W5W
Front side marker light* 5 W5W
Side turn signal light* 1 —
Rear combination light*
back-up 18 921
turn signal 21 7440A
stop/tail/side marker LED —
License plate light* 5 168
Front personal light
Spot light 8 —
Console light 1.4 —
Rear personal light 8 —
Vanity mirror light 1.4 —
Step light 2.7 158
Trunk light 3.4 158
High-mounted stop light 18 —
*: See an INFINITI dealer for replacement.
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D,
E or F. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
To remove the light bulb, push in the bulb
toward the front and turn, and then pull it
out toward the rear.
SDI1679 SDI1655
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
SDI1656
SDI1657
SDI1658
SDI1258A
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in
the “6. In case of emergency” section.
TIRE PRESSURE
Low tire pressure warning system
This vehicle is equipped with the low tire
pressure warning system. It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
When the low tire pressure warning light
is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. The system also displays pressure of all tires (except the
spare tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed
in each wheel.
The low tire pressure warning system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also,
this system may not detect a sudden drop
in tire pressure (for example a flat tire
while driving).
For more details, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section, “Tire pressure information” in the “4. Display screen,
heater, air conditioner and audio systems” section, “Low tire pressure warning
system” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section, and “Flat tire” in the “6. In case
of emergency” section.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure of the tires (including
the spare) often and always prior to long
distance trips. The recommended tire
pressure specifications are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label under
the “Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure” heading. The Tire and Loading
Information label is affixed to the driver
side center pillar. Tire pressures should
be checked regularly because:
O Most tires naturally lose air over time.
O Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.
The tire pressures should be check when
the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been
parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
Incorrect tire pressure, including under
inflation, may adversely affect tire life
and vehicle handling.
SDI1659
WHEELS AND TIRES
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
WARNING
O Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident.
O The vehicle weight capacity is indicated
on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your vehicle
may result in reduced tire life, unsafe
operating conditions due to premature
tire failure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also lead to a
serious accident. Loading beyond the
specified capacity may also result in
failure of other vehicle components.
O Before taking a long trip, or whenever
you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire
pressure gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified level.
O Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH
(137 km/h) unless it is equipped with
high speed rated tires. Driving faster
than 85 MPH (137 km/h) may result in
tire failure, loss of control and possible
injury.
O For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Tire and loading information label
j1 Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can be
seated in the vehicle.
j2 Vehicle load limit: See “loading information” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section.
j3 Original tire size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
j4 Recommended cold tire inflation pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure
when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at
moderate speeds. The recommended
cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of
tire wear, vehicle handling driveability,
tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle’s
GVWR.
j5 Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling” later
in this section.
j6 and j7 Spare tire size or compact
spare tire size (if so
equipped)
Checking the tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem sideways,
or air will escape. If the hissing sound
of air escaping from the tire is heard
while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.
SDI1661
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare it to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare. (Refer to the
“Wheels and tires” section.)
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN) for
safety standard certification. The TIN can
be used to identify the tire in case of a recall in case of recall.
j1 Tire size (example: P215/60R16 94H)
P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles.
(Not all tires have this information.)
Three-digit number (215): This number
gives the width in millimeters of the
tire from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge.
Two-digit number (60): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
R: The “R” stands for radial.
Two-digit number (16): This number is
the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
Two- or three-digit number (94): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
H: Speed Rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time. The ratings range from
98 miles per hour (MPH) to 186 MPH.
(You may not find this information on
all tires because it is not required by
law.)
j2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department
of Transportation”. The symbol
can be placed above, below or to
the left or right of the Tire Identification Number.
1st two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark
2nd two-digit code: Tire size
3rd three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional)
4th four-digit code: Date of Manufacture
Four numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For example,
SDI1575
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
the numbers 3103 means the 31st
week of 2003.
j3 Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
j4 Maximum permissible inflation pressure
This number is the greatest amount of
air pressure that should be put in the
tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
j5 Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that can
be carried by the tire. When replacing
the tires on the vehicle, always use a
tire that has the same load rating as
the factory installed tire.
j6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates that the tire requires an
inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
j7 The word “radial”
The word “radial” is shown, if the tire
has radial structure.
j8 Manufacturer or Brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.
Other tire-related terminology
In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears while lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward racing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
CAUTION
O When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(Example: summer, All Season, Snow or
Run-flat) and construction. An INFINITI
dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed
rating and availability. Replacement
tires may have a lower speed rating
than the factory equipped tires, and
may not match the potential maximum
vehicle speed. Never exceed the
maximum speed rating of the tire.
O For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information booklet.
All season tires
INFINITI specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good performance for use all year round, including
snowy and icy road conditions. All season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or
M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall.
Snow tires have better snow traction than
All season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
INFINITI specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance
on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
substantially reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
rating M&S on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, INFINITI recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary
to select tires equivalent in size and load
rating to the original equipment tires. If
you do not, it can adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires will have lower
speed ratings than factory equipped tires
and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you operate your vehicle in snowy or
icy conditions, INFINITI recommends the
use of SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all
four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some
provinces and states prohibit their use.
Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and
traction capabilities of studded snow
tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
Run-flat tires
If your vehicle is equipped with run-flat
tires, you can continue driving to a safe
location even if they are punctured. Always use run-flat tires of the same size
on all four wheels. Mixing tire sizes or
construction may reduce vehicle handling
stability. If necessary, contact your
INFINITI dealer for assistance.
O Frequently check the tire pressure information display on the monitor
screen and adjust pressure of each
tire properly. (The order of the tire
pressure figures displayed on the
screen does not correspond with the
actual order of the tire position.)
O If the vehicle is being driven with a
flat tire or very low tire pressure, the
low tire pressure warning system will
activate and warn you of it by the low
tire pressure warning light or a WARNING displayed on the monitor screen.
If this occurs, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Check the tire pressure for all four wheels and adjust the
pressure. if a tire is flat, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as possible.
WARNING
O Although you can continue driving with
a punctured run-flat tire, remember that
vehicle handling stability is reduced,
which could lead to an accident and
personal injury. Also, driving a long
distance at high speeds may damage
the tire. To drive safely:
• Do not drive at speeds above 55 MPH
(88 km/h) and do not drive more
than 50 miles (80 km) with a punctured run-flat tire. A punctured tire
may burst and cause a serious accident, resulting in personal injury.
• Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid
hard cornering or braking, which may
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
• If a rear tire is punctured, replace it
with a non-punctured tire, especially
when driving on rainy, snowy or icy
roads.
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O Always have punctured run-flat tires
replaced.
CAUTION
O Never install tire chains on a punctured
run-flat tire, as this could damage your
vehicle.
O Avoid driving over any projection or
pothole, as the clearance between the
vehicle and the ground is smaller than
normal.
O Do not enter an automated car wash
with a punctured run-flat tire.
O Have the punctured tire replaced by
your INFINITI dealer as soon as possible, as the tire’s performance capability is reduced.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws
before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of
proper size for the tires on your vehicle
and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. Use only SAE
Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used
on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle
clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S”
chains are designed to meet the SAE
standard minimum clearances between
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction
device (tire chains or cables). The
minimum clearances are determined
using the factory equipped tire size. Other
types may damage your vehicle. Use
chain tensioners when recommended by
the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage
to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when
using tire chains. In addition, drive at a
reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle
may be damaged and/or vehicle handling
and performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
rear wheels and not on the front wheels.
Do not drive with tire chains on paved
roads which are clear of snow. Driving
with chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
CAUTION
O Do not use tire chains on dry roads.
O Never install tire chains on a T-type
spare tire or a punctured run-flat tire,
as this could damage your vehicle.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
INFINITI recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). See “Flat
tire” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section for tire replacing procedures.
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a torque
wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specification at each tire rotation interval.
WARNING
O After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.
O Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
O Do not include the T-type spare tire or
any other small size spare tire in the
tire rotation.
O For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
1. Wear indicator
2. Wear indicator location mark
Tire wear and damage
WARNING
O Tires should be periodically inspected
for wear, cracking, bulging or objects
caught in the tread. If excessive wear,
cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found,
the tire(s) should be replaced.
O The original tires have built-in tread
SDI1662 SDI1663
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
wear indicators. When wear indicators
are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.
O Improper service of the spare tire may
result in serious personal injury. If it is
necessary to repair the spare tire, contact an INFINITI dealer.
O For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size,
speed rating and load carrying capacity
as the original equipment tires. See
“Specifications” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section for recommended types and sizes of tires and
wheels.
WARNING
O The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of different brands, construction (bias, biasbelted radial, run-flat), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride,
braking, handling, ground clearance,
body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of
these effects may lead to accidents and
could result in serious personal injury.
O If the wheels are changed for any
reason, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could
cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics and/or
interference with the brake
discs/drums. Such interference can
lead to decreased braking efficiency
and/or early brake pad/shoe wear.
Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “9.
Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual for wheel off-set
dimensions.
O When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not
be indicated and the low tire pressure
warning system will not function. Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
O Do not install a deformed wheel or tire
even if it has been repaired. Such
wheels or tires could have structural
damage and could fail without warning.
O The use of retread tire is not recommended.
O For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Even with regular
use, wheels can get out of balance. ThereMaintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
fore, they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the driving wheels on the
vehicle could lead to transmission
damage.
O For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the INFINITI
Warranty Information Booklet.
Care of wheels
O Wash the wheels when washing the
vehicle to maintain their appearance.
O Clean the inner side of the wheels
when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.
O Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
O Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents
or corrosion. Such damage may cause
loss of pressure or poor seal at the
tire bead.
O INFINITI recommends that the road
wheels be waxed to protect against
road salt in areas where it is used
during winter.
Spare tire (T-type spare tire — if
so equipped)
When a spare tire is mounted (t-type or
conventional), the low tire pressure warning system will not function.
Observe the following precautions if the
T-type spare tire must be used, otherwise
your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident.
WARNING
O The T-type spare tire should be used for
emergency use. It should be replaced
with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.
O Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
O Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure
of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Always
keep the pressure of the full size spare
tire (if so equipped) at the recommended pressure for standard tires, as
indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. For Tire and Loading Information label location, see “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the index
of this manual.
O With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive your vehicle
at speeds faster than 50 MPH (80
km/h).
O When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire should be used on the front
wheels and original tire used on the
rear wheels (drive wheels). Use tire
chains only on the two rear original
tires.
O Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire will wear at a faster rate than
the standard tire. Replace the spare tire
as soon as the tread wear indicators
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
appear.
O Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles.
O Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
O Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
CAUTION
O Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will
not fit properly and may cause damage
to the vehicle.
O Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
MEMO
8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
9 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ... 9-2
Fuel recommendation.................................. 9-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation..... 9-5
Recommended SAE viscosity number .......... 9-6
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
lubricant recommendations......................... 9-7
Specifications................................................... 9-8
Engine......................................................... 9-8
Wheels and tires......................................... 9-9
Dimensions and weights ............................. 9-9
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country.............................................. 9-10
Vehicle identification...................................... 9-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate.. 9-10
Vehicle identification number
(Chassis number) ...................................... 9-10
Engine serial number ................................ 9-11
F.M.V.S.S. certification label ..................... 9-11
Emission control information label ............ 9-11
Tire and loading information label ............ 9-12
Air conditioner specification label ............. 9-12
Installing front license plate .......................... 9-13
Vehicle loading information............................ 9-14
Terms........................................................ 9-14
Vehicle load capacity ................................ 9-15
Loading tips.............................................. 9-16
Towing a trailer .............................................. 9-16
Maximum load limits................................. 9-17
Towing load/specification ......................... 9-18
Towing safety............................................ 9-18
Flat towing ................................................ 9-21
Uniform tire quality grading ........................... 9-22
Emission control system warranty .................. 9-23
Reporting safety defects (US only).................. 9-23
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test
(US only) ........................................................ 9-23
Event data recorders ..................................... 9-24
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information..................................................... 9-25
In the event of a collision......................... 9-25
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate)
Recommended specifications
US measure Imp measure Liter
Fuel 21-1/8 gal 17-5/8 gal 80 Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1
Engine oil (Drain and refill)*6 O API Certification Mark*2, *3
O API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*2, *3
O ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III*2, *3
With oil filter change 5-7/8 qt 4-7/8 qt 5.6
Without oil filter change 5-1/4 qt 4-3/8 qt 5.0
Cooling system
With reservoir 10-3/8 qt 8-5/8 qt 9.8
Genuine Nissan Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
Reservoir 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8
Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent*4
Brake fluid Genuine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*7 or equivalent DOT 3
Automatic transmission fluid — — — Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF*5
Differential gear oil — — — API GL-5 Viscosity SAE 80W-90*8
Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)
Air conditioning system lubricants Nissan A/C System OilType S or equivalent
Windshield washer fluid Genuine Nissan Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze Fluid or equivalent.
*1: For additional information, see later in this section for fuel recommendation.
*2: For additional information, see later in this section for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.
*3: For additional information, see later in this section for recommended SAE viscosity number.
*4: For Canada, Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM, or equivalent ATF may also be used.
*5: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not
covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.
*6: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.
*7: Available in mainland US through your INFINITI dealer.
*8: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F).
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
9-2 Technical and consumer information
Z 05.2.25/F50-D X
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an
octane rating of at least 91 AKI (AntiKnock Index) number (Research octane
number 96).
If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of 87 AKI number (Research octane
number 91) may be temporarily used, but
only under the following precautions:
O Have the fuel tank filled only partially
with unleaded regular gasoline, and
fill up with unleaded premium gasoline as soon as possible.
O Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration
CAUTION
Using a fuel other than that specified could
adversely affect the emission control
system, and may also affect warranty coverage.
Under no circumstances should a leaded
gasoline be used, because this will damage
the three-way catalyst.
Gasoline specifications
INFINITI recommends using gasoline that
meets the World-wide Fuel Charter specifications where it is available. Many of the
automobile manufacturers developed this
specification to improve emission system
and vehicle performance. Ask your service
station manager if the gasoline meets the
World-wide Fuel Charter specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing
reformulated gasolines. These gasolines
are specially designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. INFINITI supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you
use reformulated gasoline when available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE
and methanol with or without advertising
their presence. INFINITI does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility
for your INFINITI cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
please take the following precautions as
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system
damage.
O The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
O If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a
methanol blend, is used, it should
contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
O If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in INFINITI vehicles.
If any undesirable driveability problems
such as engine stalling and hard hot
Technical and consumer information 9-3
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
starting are experienced after using
oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel
with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.
Aftermarket fuel additives
INFINITI does not recommend the use of
any aftermarket fuel additives (Example:
fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which
are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent
or similar ingredients that can be harmful
to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended above
can cause persistent, heavy spark knock.
(Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.)
If severe, this can lead to engine
damage. If you detect a persistent heavy
spark knock even when using gasoline of
the stated octane rating, or if you hear
steady spark knock while holding a
steady speed on level roads, have your
dealer correct the condition. Failure to
correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which INFINITI is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing will result in
knocking, after-run or overheating. This in
turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage to the engine. If any of
the above symptoms are encountered,
have your vehicle checked at an INFINITI
dealer or other competent service facility.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is no
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
9-4 Technical and consumer information
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. API certification mark
2. API service symbol
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATION
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct quality, and viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory
engine life and performance. INFINITI
recommends the use of a low friction oil
(energy conserving oil) in order to improve fuel economy and conserve energy.
Oils which do not have the specified
quality label should not be used as they
could cause engine damage.
Only those engine oils with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification
mark on the front of the container should
be used. This type of oil supersedes the
existing API SG, SH or SJ and Energy Conserving I & II categories.
If you cannot find engine oil with the API
certification mark, use an API grade SJ or
SL, Energy Conserving oil. An ILSAC grade
GF-II & GF-III oil can also be used.
INFINITI recommends mineral based oils.
These oils must however, meet the API
quality and SAE viscosity ratings specified
for your vehicle.
Oil additives
INFINITI does not recommend the use of
oil additives. The use of an oil additive is
not necessary when the proper oil type is
used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. The chart
of recommended SAE viscosity number
shows the recommended oil viscosities
for the expected ambient temperatures.
Choosing an oil viscosity other than that
recommended could cause serious engine
damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new vehicle is equipped with a highquality genuine Nissan oil filter. When reSTI0367A
Technical and consumer information 9-5
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
placing, use the genuine oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in
change intervals.
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
your engine are based on the use of the
specified quality oils and filters. Oil and
filter other than the specified quality, or
oil and filter change intervals longer than
recommended could reduce engine life.
Damage to engines caused by improper
maintenance or use of incorrect oil and
filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new INFINITI vehicle warranties.
Your engine was filled with a high quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not
have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter
change intervals depend upon how you
use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes.
O repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures,
O driving in dusty conditions,
O extensive idling,
O towing a trailer,
O stop and go “rush hour” traffic,
O aggressive driving.
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY
NUMBER
SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for
all temperatures. SAE 10W-30, 10W-40
viscosity oil may be used if the outside
TI1028-C
9-6 Technical and consumer information
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
temperature is above 0°F (−18°C).
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioning system in your
INFINITI vehicle must be charged with
the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and
the lubricant, Nissan A/C system oil Type
S or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or lubricant
will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
INFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. Although this refrigerant
does not affect the earth’s atmosphere,
certain governmental regulations require
the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioning
system service. Your INFINITI dealer has
the trained technicians and equipment
needed to recover and recycle your air
conditioning system refrigerant.
Contact your INFINITI dealer when servicing your air conditioning system.
Technical and consumer information 9-7
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
ENGINE
Model VK45DE
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle
Cylinder arrangement 8-cylinder, V-slanted at 90°
Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.661 x 3.256 (93.0 x 82.7)
Displacement cu in (cm3) 274.2 (4,494)
Firing order j1 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
Idle speed rpm
See the emission control information label on the
underside of the hood.Ignition timing (BTDC) degree/rpm
CO percentage at idle speed [No air]
Spark plug
Standard PLFR5A-11
Hot type PLFR4A-11
Cold type PLFR6A-11
Camshaft operation Timing chain
Alternator belt size
Width x Length in (mm) 0.841 x 76.38(21.36 x 1,940)
The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
STI0397
SPECIFICATIONS
9-8 Technical and consumer information
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
WHEELS AND TIRES
Road wheel
Type Size Offset in (mm)
Aluminum
17 x 7-1/2JJ
18 x 8JJ
18 x 7.5JJ*
1.38 (35)
1.57 (40)*
Tire
Conventional
225/55R17
245/45R18
Spare
T145/90D16
Conventional
Pressure (cold)
Conventional 33 PSI (230 kPa)
Spare (T-type) 60 PSI (420 kPa)
*: Model without chrome wheel
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length in (mm) 200.8 (5,100)
Overall width in (mm) 72.6 (1,845)
Overall height in (mm) 58.7 (1,490)
Front tread in (mm)
62.6 (1,590)*
62.2 (1,580)**
Rear tread in (mm)
61.8 (1,570)*
61.4 (1,560)**
Wheelbase in (mm) 113.0 (2,870)
*: 17 inch and 18 inch chrome wheel model
**: 18 inch without chrome wheel model
Technical and consumer information 9-9
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
If you plan to travel in another country,
you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine.
Using fuel with too low an octane rating
may cause engine damage. All gasoline
vehicles must be operated with unleaded
gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is
not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to
modify the vehicle to meet local laws and
regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country,
state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. INFINITI is not
responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN) PLATE
The vehicle identification number plate is
attached as shown. This number is the
identification for your vehicle and is used
in the vehicle registration.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (Chassis number)
The number is stamped as shown.
STI0169 STI0263
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
9-10 Technical and consumer information
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S.) or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label
contains valuable vehicle information,
such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR),
month and year of manufacture, Vehicle
Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Review it
carefully.
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is
attached as shown.
STI0266B STI0398 STI0401
Technical and consumer information 9-11
Z 05.2.25/F50-D X
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label affixed
to the pillar as illustrated.
AIR CONDITIONER
SPECIFICATION LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is
attached as shown.
STI0375 STI0313 STI0312
9-12 Technical and consumer information
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Use the following steps to mount the license plate:
Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed
in the vinyl bag.
O License plate bracket
O J-nut x 2
O Screw x 2
O Screw grommet x 2
1. Temporarily place the license plate
bracket while aligning part jA of the
front bumper with part jB of the rear
surface of the license plate bracket.
2. To determine where to drill the hole,
mark along both sides of the
mounting hole by using a felt-tip pen.
3. Remove the license plate bracket and
connect the arcs to form ovals. Mark
the point in the center of each oval.
These are the pilot drilling locations.
4. Carefully drill two pilot holes using a
0.39 inch (10 mm) drill bit at the
marked locations. (Be sure that the
drill only goes through the fascia, or
damage to the nut may occur.)STI0402
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
Technical and consumer information 9-13
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
5. Insert grommets into the hole on the
fascia.
6. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the
grommet hole to add 90° turn onto the
part jC .
7. Insert a J-nut into the license plate
bracket before placing the license
plate bracket on the fascia.
8. Install the license plate bracket with
screws.
9. Install the license plate with bolts that
are no longer than 0.55 inch (14 mm).
WARNING
O It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area inside the vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
O Do not allow people to ride in any area
of vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
O Be sure everyone in the vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly
fastened.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with
the following terms before loading your
vehicle:
O Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids,
emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include
passengers and cargo.
O GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
O GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) maximum total combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and
any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S.
label.
O GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S. label.
O GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.
O Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle.
This is the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle
is used to tow a trailer, the trailer
tongue weight must be included as
part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
9-14 Technical and consumer information
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O Cargo capacity - permissible weight of
cargo, the weight of total occupants
weight subtracted from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
the number of occupants shown as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants
and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight
to the value. Examples are shown in the
illustration.
Steps for determining correct load
limit
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
(4) The resulting figure equals the availSTI0400
Technical and consumer information 9-15
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs. [1,400 − 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs.]
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. For safety, that weight
must not exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
LOADING TIPS
O The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
O Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
WARNING
O Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks.
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
O Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than the GVWR or the maximum front
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of
your vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause personal
injury.
O Overloading not only could shorten the
life of your vehicle and the tires, but
also could lead to hazardous vehicle
handling and long braking distance.
This may cause a premature tire malfunction, which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by your warranty.
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a trailer
and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle
handling, braking and performance and
may lead to accidents.
CAUTION
O Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy
load for the first 500 miles (800 km).
TI1011M
TOWING A TRAILER
9-16 Technical and consumer information
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Your engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
O For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used
primarily to carry passengers and cargo.
Remember that towing a trailer will place
additional loads on your vehicle’s engine,
drive train, steering, braking and other systems.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed
the value specified in the Towing
Load/Specification Chart found later in this
section. The total trailer load equals trailer
weight plus its cargo weight.
Towing loads greater than specified or
using improper towing equipment could
adversely affect vehicle handling, braking
and performance. The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to
the maximum trailer loads, but also the
places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to
be reduced on very steep grades or in low
traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper
towing procedures are not covered by
INFINITI warranties.
Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 9 and 11%
of the total trailer load within the maximum
tongue load limits shown in the following
Towing Load/Specification chart. If the
tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange
cargo to allow for proper tongue load.
Technical and consumer information 9-17
Z 04.11.30/F50-D X
Maximum gross vehicle weight/
maximum gross axle weight
The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed GVWR shown on
the F.M.V.S.S. certification label. The
gross vehicle weight equals the combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load
and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight
must not exceed GAWR shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART
Unit: lb (kg)
MAXIMUM
TOWING LOAD
1,000 (454)
MAXIMUM
TONGUE LOAD
110 (49)
TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle
and trailer. Make sure the trailer hitch is
securely attached to the vehicle, to help
avoid personal injury or property damage
due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough
road surfaces or passing trucks.
Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and
weight rating for your trailer:
O The required hitch ball size is stamped
on most trailer couplers. Most hitch
balls also have the size printed on top
of the ball.
O Choose the proper class hitch ball
based on the trailer weight.
O The diameter of the threaded shank of
the hitch ball must be matched to the
ball mount hole diameter. The hitch
ball shank should be no more than
1/169 smaller than the hole in the ball
mount.
O The threaded shank of the hitch ball
must be long enough to be properly
secured to the ball mount. There
should be at least 2 threads showing
beyond the lock washer and nut.
Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver,
ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to
tow trailers of a maximum weight of
2,000 lb (909 kg).
You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment to the vehicle that has a 2,000 lb
(909 kg) maximum weight rating, but your
vehicle is only capable of towing the
maximum trailer weights shown in the
Towing Load/Specification Chart earlier in
this section.
CAUTION
O Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
TI1012M
9-18 Technical and consumer information
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
O The hitch should not be attached to or
affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.
O Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. to install a
trailer hitch.
O To reduce the possibility of additional
damage if your vehicle is struck from
the rear, where practical, remove the
hitch and/or receiver when not in use.
After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt
holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water
or dust from entering the passenger
compartment.
O Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting bolts are securely mounted.
Tire pressures
O When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold
tire pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label.
Refer to the “Tire and loading information label” earlier in this section for
label location.
O Trailer tire condition, size, load rating
and proper inflation pressure should
be in accordance with the trailer and
tire manufacturers’ specifications.
Safety chains
Always use a suitable chain between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains
should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle
bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough
slack in the chains to permit turning corners.
Trailer lights
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available powertype module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. This
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and turn
signal circuits as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more than
15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp
circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle’s electrical system. See a
reputable trailer dealer to obtain the proper
equipment and to have it installed.
Trailer lights should comply with federal
and/or local regulations. For assistance in
hooking up trailer lights, contact an
INFINITI dealer or reputable trailer
dealer.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to federal
and/or local regulations and that it is
properly installed.
WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.
Pre-towing tips
O Be certain your vehicle maintains a
level position when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive
Technical and consumer information 9-19
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
the vehicle if it has an abnormal
nose-up or nose-down condition; check
for improper tongue load, overload,
worn suspension or other possible
causes of either condition.
O Always secure items in the trailer to
prevent load shifts while driving.
O Load the trailer so approximately 60%
of the trailer load is in the front half and
40% is in the back half.
O Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,
vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every
time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.
O Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.
Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding
of the vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an
area which is free from traffic. Steering stability, and braking performance will be
somewhat different than under normal
driving conditions.
O Always secure items in the trailer to
prevent load shift while driving.
O Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or
stops.
O Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
O Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed. Some states or provinces have
specific speed limits for vehicles that
are towing trailers. Obey the local
speed limits.
O When backing up, hold the bottom of
the steering wheel with one hand. Move
your hand in the direction in which you
want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible, have someone guide you when
you are backing up.
O Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking
on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so, and if your vehicle is equipped with automatic transmission, first block the wheels and
apply the parking brake, and then move
the transmission selector lever into the
P (Park) position. If you move the selector lever to the P (Park) position before
blocking the wheels and applying the
parking brake, transmission damage
could occur.
O When going down a hill, shift into a
lower gear and use the engine braking
effect. When going up a long grade,
downshift the transmission to a lower
gear and reduce speed to reduce
chances of engine overloading and/or
overheating.
O If the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air
conditioning system is on, turn off the
air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high
and setting the temperature control to
the HOT position.
O Trailer towing requires more fuel than
normal circumstances.
O Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500
miles (800 km).
O Have your vehicle serviced more often
than at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule in the
INFINITI Service and Maintenance
Guide.
O When making a turn, your trailer wheels
will be closer to the inside of
9-20 Technical and consumer information
Z 04.11.29/F50-D X
the turn than your vehicle wheels. To
compensate for this, make a larger than
normal turning radius during the turn.
O Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling,
possibly causing vehicle sway. When
being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly grip
the steering wheel, steer straight
ahead, and immediately (but gradually)
reduce vehicle speed. This combination
will help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase speed.
O Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires
considerably more distance than
normal passing. Remember the length
of the trailer must also pass the other
vehicle before you can safely change
lanes.
O To maintain engine braking efficiency
and electrical charging performance,
do not use fifth position.
O Avoid holding the brake pedal down too
long or too frequently. This could cause
the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.
O Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances
while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops
and brake gradually.
O Do not use cruise control while towing
a trailer.
O Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness connections, and trailer wheel
lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of
travel and at every break.
O When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather, put the
vehicle in the P (Park) position.
When towing a trailer, change fluid in the
transmission more frequently.
For additional information, see the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
earlier in this manual.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground is sometimes called flat
towing. This method is sometimes used
when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
O Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
O Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
O DO NOT tow any automatic transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL
DAMAGE internal transmission parts
due to lack of transmission lubrication.
O For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing Recommended by
INFINITI” in the “6. In case of emergency” section of this manual.
Automatic transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the
towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always
follow the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product.
Technical and consumer information 9-21
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must
conform to federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
Treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on tire wear rate when tested
under controlled conditions on specified
government test courses. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and a
half (1-1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. However, relative tire performance depends
on actual driving conditions, and may
vary significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B and C. Those grades
represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to your vehicle
tires is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak
traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
Temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C. They represent a tire’s resistance to heat build-up, and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause tire material to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive
temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a performance level which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A
and B represent higher levels of performance on laboratory test wheels than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under
inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
9-22 Technical and consumer information
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Your INFINITI is covered by the following
emission warranties.
For US:
O Emission Defects Warranty
O Emissions Performance Warranty
(See Warranty Information Booklet for
details.)
For Canada:
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of these warranties may be found
with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet (Warranty and
Roadside Assistance Information (Canada
only)) that comes with your INFINITI. If
you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet (Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information (Canada only)), or it has
become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
O INFINITI Division
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 47038, Gardena,
CA 90247-6838
O Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario,
L4W 4Z5
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying INFINITI.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or INFINITI.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call
the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236. You may also write
to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from the
Hotline.
You may notify INFINITI by contacting
our Consumer Affairs Department,
toll-free, at 1-800-662-6200.
Due to legal requirements in some states,
your vehicle may be required to be in
what is called the ready condition for an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the ready condition
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the ready condition can
be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the
vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the
vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
readiness condition. Turn the ignition
switch ON without starting the engine. If
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
comes on steady for 20 seconds and then
blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”.
If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a
“not ready” condition, drive the vehicle
through the following pattern to set the
vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only) READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)
Technical and consumer information 9-23
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
pattern, an INFINITI dealer can conduct it
for you.
WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic conditions
and obey all traffic laws.
1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to
idle until the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points between the C
and H (normal operating temperature).
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 10 seconds.
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal
for a moment, then drive the vehicle at
a speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96
km/h) for at least 9 minutes.
4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running.
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55
km/h) and maintain the speed for 20
seconds.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
km/h) and maintain the speed for at
least 3 minutes.
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission gear selector lever in the “P” or
“N” position.
9. Turn the engine off.
10.Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one
more time.
If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat
the preceding step. Any safe driving mode
is acceptable between steps. Do not stop
the engine until step 7 is completed.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of
computers that monitor and control a
number of systems to optimize performance and help service technicians with
diagnosis and repair. Depending on the
equipment on your vehicle, some of the
computers monitor emission control systems, braking systems and air bag systems, just to name a few. Some data
about vehicle operation may be stored in
the computers for use during servicing.
Other data may be stored if a crash event
occurs. For example, air bag readiness,
air bag performance, and seat belt use by
the driver or passenger may be recorded,
depending on vehicle equipment. These
types of systems are sometimes called
Event Data Recorders.
Special equipment can be used to access
the electronic data that may be stored in
the vehicle’s computers (sounds are not
recorded). INFINITI and INFINITI dealers
have equipment to access some of this
data; others may also have this equipment. The data may be retrieved during
routine vehicle servicing or for special research. It might also be accessed with
the consent of the vehicle owner or
leasee, in response to a request by law
enforcement, or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.
EVENT DATA RECORDERS
9-24 Technical and consumer information
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the
best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this
manual is the same one used by the factory
trained technicians working at INFINITI
dealer. Also available are genuine INFINITI
Owner’s Manuals, and genuine INFINITI
Service and Owner’s Manuals for older
INFINITI models.
In the USA:
For current pricing and availability of genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the 2000
model year and later, contact:
Tweddle Litho Company
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the 1999
model year and prior, see an INFINITI
dealer, or contact:
Resolve Corporation
20770 Westwood Road
Strongsville, OH 44136
1-800-247-5321
For current pricing and availability of genuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals for the
2005 model year and prior, see an
INFINITI dealer, or contact:
Resolve Corporation
20770 Westwood Road
Strongsville, OH 44136
1-800-247-5321
In Canada:
To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITI
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please
contact your nearest INFINITI dealer. For
the phone number and location of an
INFINITI dealer in your area call the
INFINITI Satisfaction Center at 1-800-3614792 and a bilingual INFINITI representative will assist you.
Also available are genuine INFINITI Service and Owner’s Manuals for older
INFINITI models.
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this
unlikely event, there is some important information you should know. Many insurance companies routinely authorize the
use of non-genuine collision parts in order
to cut costs, among other reasons.
Insist on the use of Genuine
INFINITI Collision Parts!
If you want your vehicle to be restored
using parts made to INFINITI’s original exacting specifications — if you want to help
it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your insurance agent
and your repair shop to only use Genuine
INFINITI Collision Parts. INFINITI does
not warrant non-INFINITI parts, nor does
INFINITI’s warranty apply to damage
caused by a non-genuine part.
Using Genuine INFINITI Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your
warranty protection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine INFINITI
Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of
your lease.
INFINITI designs its hoods with crumple
zones to minimize the risk that the hood
will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built in
safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often
show premature wear, rust and corrosion.
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL
ORDER INFORMATION
Technical and consumer information 9-25
Z 04.11.29/F50-D X
Why should you take a chance?
In over 40 states, the law says you must
be advised if non-genuine parts are used
to repair your vehicle. And some states
have enacted laws that restrict insurance
companies from authorizing the use of
non-genuine collision parts during the
new vehicle warranty. These laws help
protect you, so you can take action to
protect yourself.
It’s your right!
9-26 Technical and consumer information
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
10 Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock brake system).......... 5-43
Active damper suspension.............. 5-39
Active damper suspension mode select
switch ............................................ 2-31
Air bag system, Side and curtain
(See supplemental side air bag and
curtain side-impact air bag
system) .......................................... 1-41
Air bag warning labels ................... 1-44
Air bag warning light............. 1-44, 2-14
Air cleaner housing filter ................ 8-19
Air conditioner
Air conditioner service .............. 4-18
Air conditioner specification
label ......................................... 9-12
Air conditioning system refrigerant
and lubricant
recommendations .............. 4-18, 9-7
Automatic climate control.......... 4-13
In-cabin microfilter ................... 4-17
Operation (See automatic climate
control) ..................................... 4-13
Rear control button ................... 4-17
Alcohol, drugs and driving ............... 5-5
Ambient temperature, Air
conditioner ..................................... 4-16
Anchor point locations
Top tether strap ........................ 1-24
Antenna.......................................... 4-35
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ......... 5-43
Appearance care
Exterior appearance care............. 7-2
Interior appearance care............. 7-4
Ashtrays (See cigarette lighters and
ashtrays) ........................................ 2-33
Audible reminders .......................... 2-16
Audio operation precautions........... 4-19
Audio rear control switch ............... 4-34
Audio system ................................. 4-18
Audio rear control switch .......... 4-34
Steering wheel audio controls... 4-33
Autochanger, Compact Disc (CD) .... 4-31
Automatic
Automatic transmission fluid
(ATF).......................................... 8-14
Automatic transmission position
indicator light ........................... 2-14
Climate control.......................... 4-13
Drive positioner......................... 3-20
Driving with automatic
transmission ........................ 5-6, 5-9
Seat positioner, seat................. 3-20
Transmission selector lever lock
release...................................... 5-13
Avoiding collision and rollover ......... 5-5
B
Battery ........................................... 8-16
Battery saver system................. 2-25
Before starting the engine................ 5-8
Belts (See drive belts) .................... 8-17
Brake
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .... 5-43
Brake booster ........................... 8-22
Brake fluid ................................ 8-14
Brake pedal .............................. 8-21
Brake pedal check .................... 8-21
Brake system ............................ 5-40
Parking brake check ........ 5-14, 8-21
Parking brake operation............ 5-14
Warning light ............................ 2-11
Break-in schedule........................... 5-37
Brightness control, Instrument
panel.............................................. 2-26
Bulb check/instrument panel.......... 2-10
Bulb replacement ........................... 8-26
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
C
Cabin air filter ................................ 4-17
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants ......................................... 9-2
Car phone or CB radio.................... 4-35
Cargo (See vehicle loading
information).................................... 9-14
Cargo net ....................................... 2-37
Cassette player (See audio
system) .......................................... 4-29
CD care and cleaning ..................... 4-32
Child restraints............................... 1-15
Booster seat installation on front
passenger seat ......................... 1-32
Booster seat installation on rear seat
center or outboard positions..... 1-31
Child restraint installation on front
passenger seat ......................... 1-25
Child restraint installation on rear
seat center or outboard
positions................................... 1-17
LATCH ....................................... 1-22
Precautions on child
restraints .................................. 1-15
Top tether strap anchor point
locations ................................... 1-24
With top tether strap................. 1-24
Child safety ...................................... 1-9
Child safety rear door lock ............... 3-6
Chimes
Audible reminders..................... 2-16
Seat belt warning light and
chime........................................ 2-13
Cigarette lighters and ashtrays....... 2-33
Circuit breaker, Fusible link............ 8-24
Cleaning exterior and interior.... 7-2, 7-4
Climate control, Automatic climate
control............................................ 4-13
Climate controlled seats ................. 2-30
Clock .............................................. 2-32
Cold weather driving ...................... 5-46
Command (See voice-activated
control system)............................... 4-43
Compact Disc (CD) changer
operation........................................ 4-31
Compass .......................................... 2-6
Console box ................................... 2-37
Control panel button functions ......... 4-2
Controls
Audio rear control switch .......... 4-34
Control panel button (display)..... 4-2
Heater and air conditioner
controls (See automatic climate
control) ..................................... 4-13
Steering wheel audio controls... 4-33
Coolant
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants.................................... 9-2
Changing engine coolant........... 8-10
Checking engine coolant level..... 8-9
Corrosion protection......................... 7-5
Cruise control................................. 5-14
Cruise control, Fixed speed cruise
control (on ICC system).................. 5-33
Cruise control, Intelligent cruise
control system................................ 5-16
Cup holders.................................... 2-34
Curtain side-impact air bag system
(See supplemental side air bag and
curtain side-impact air bag
system) .......................................... 1-41
D
Daytime running light system......... 2-25
Defroster switch, Rear window and
outside mirror defroster switch ...... 2-22
Dimensions and weights .................. 9-9
Display controls (See control panel
button functions) .............................. 4-2
Door open warning light................. 2-11
Drive belts...................................... 8-17
Drive positioner, Automatic ............ 3-20
Driving
Cold weather driving ................. 5-46
Driving with automatic
transmission ........................ 5-6, 5-9
Precautions when starting and
driving ........................................ 5-2
10-2
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
E
Economy, Fuel ................................ 5-37
Emission control information
label............................................... 9-11
Emission control system
warranty ......................................... 9-23
Engine
Before starting the engine........... 5-8
Break-in schedule ..................... 5-37
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants.................................... 9-2
Changing engine coolant........... 8-10
Changing engine oil .................. 8-12
Changing engine oil filter.......... 8-13
Checking engine coolant level..... 8-9
Checking engine oil level .......... 8-11
Coolant temperature gauge ......... 2-5
Engine block heater .................. 5-48
Engine compartment check
locations ..................................... 8-7
Engine cooling system ................ 8-9
Engine oil.................................. 8-11
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation ......................... 9-5
Engine oil viscosity ..................... 9-5
Engine serial number ................ 9-11
Engine specifications .................. 9-8
If your vehicle overheats .......... 6-12
Starting the engine ..................... 5-9
Entry/exit assist ............................... 1-4
Event data recorders ...................... 9-24
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) ....... 5-2
F
F.M.V.S.S. certification label........... 9-11
Filter
Air cleaner housing filter........... 8-19
Changing engine oil filter.......... 8-13
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher
switch) ........................................... 2-27
Flat tire ............................................ 6-2
Flat tire, Low tire pressure warning
system ............................................. 5-3
Floor mat cleaning............................ 7-4
Fluid
Automatic transmission fluid
(ATF).......................................... 8-14
Brake fluid ................................ 8-14
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants.................................... 9-2
Engine coolant ............................ 8-9
Engine oil.................................. 8-11
Power steering fluid .................. 8-14
Window washer fluid................. 8-15
FM-AM radio with cassette player and
Compact Disc (CD) changer ............ 4-22
Fog light switch.............................. 2-27
Front power seat adjustment ............ 1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants.................................... 9-2
Filler cap ................................... 3-15
Filler lid .................................... 3-15
Fuel economy............................ 5-37
Fuel economy information
(display).................................... 4-37
Fuel octane rating .............. 9-3, 10-9
Fuel recommendation......... 9-3, 10-9
Gauge ......................................... 2-6
Fuses.............................................. 8-23
Fusible links ................................... 8-24
G
Garage door opener, HomeLink
Universal Transceiver...................... 2-46
Gas cap.......................................... 3-15
Gasoline specifications..................... 9-3
Gauge .............................................. 2-3
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.......................................... 2-5
Fuel gauge .................................. 2-6
Odometer.................................... 2-4
Speedometer............................... 2-4
Tachometer ................................. 2-5
General maintenance........................ 8-2
Glove box ....................................... 2-36
Glove box lock................................ 2-36
10-3
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
H
Hazard warning flasher switch........ 2-27
Head restraint .................................. 1-5
Headlights
Bulb replacement ...................... 8-27
Headlight switch ....................... 2-23
Xenon headlights ...................... 2-22
Heated seats .................................. 2-28
Heater
Automatic climate control.......... 4-13
Engine coolant heater ............... 5-48
HomeLink Universal Transceiver ... 2-46
Hood release .................................... 3-9
Horn ............................................... 2-28
I
Ignition switch ................................. 5-6
Automatic transmission
models................................. 5-6, 5-9
Key positions .............................. 5-7
Immobilizer system........................ 2-18
In-cabin microfilter......................... 4-17
Indicator lights............................... 2-14
Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer System
Engine start ................................ 5-7
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
test ................................................ 9-23
Instrument brightness control ........ 2-26
Instrument panel.............................. 2-2
Intelligent cruise control (ICC)
system ........................................... 5-16
Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system,
Preview function............................. 5-37
Interior light replacement............... 8-28
Interior lights ................................. 2-43
J
Jump starting.................................... 6-9
K
Keyless entry (See remote keyless entry
system) ............................................ 3-6
Keys (Electronic ignition key)............ 3-2
L
Label, Air conditioner specification
label............................................... 9-12
Label, Emission control information
label............................................... 9-11
Label, F.M.V.S.S. certification
label............................................... 9-11
Labels
Air bag warning labels .............. 1-44
Engine serial number ................ 9-11
Vehicle identification number
(VIN) ......................................... 9-10
LATCH............................................. 1-22
License plate, Installing front license
plate............................................... 9-13
Light
Air bag warning light ................ 1-44
Bulb replacement ...................... 8-26
Fog light switch......................... 2-27
Headlight switch ....................... 2-23
Headlights Bulb replacement .... 8-27
Interior lights............................ 2-43
Personal lights .......................... 2-44
Replacement ............................. 8-26
Room light ................................ 2-43
Trunk light ................................ 2-46
Vanity mirror lights ................... 2-45
Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders............ 2-10, 2-14
Xenon headlights ...................... 2-22
Lights, Exterior and interior light
replacement ................................... 8-28
Loading information (See vehicle
loading information) ....................... 9-14
Lock
Door locks................................... 3-4
Glove box lock .......................... 2-36
Power door lock .......................... 3-4
Trunk lid lock opener lever........ 3-10
Low fuel warning light .................... 2-12
Low tire pressure warning light ...... 2-12
Low tire pressure warning
system ............................. 5-3, 6-2, 8-31
10-4
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
M
Maintenance
Battery ...................................... 8-16
General maintenance .................. 8-2
Inside the vehicle ....................... 8-3
Maintenance information
(display).................................... 4-38
Maintenance precautions ............ 8-5
Outside the vehicle ..................... 8-2
Seat belt maintenance .............. 1-14
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).... 2-15
Meters and gauges........................... 2-3
Meters and gauges, Instrument
brightness control .......................... 2-26
Mirror
Outside mirror control............... 3-19
Outside mirrors ......................... 3-19
N
Net, Cargo net ................................ 2-37
New vehicle break-in ...................... 5-37
Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer
System ........................................... 2-17
O
Odometer ......................................... 2-4
Oil
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants.................................... 9-2
Changing engine oil .................. 8-12
Checking engine oil level .......... 8-11
Engine oil.................................. 8-11
Engine oil viscosity ..................... 9-5
Outside mirror control .................... 3-19
Outside mirrors .............................. 3-19
Overheat, If your vehicle
overheats ....................................... 6-12
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information..................................... 9-25
P
Parking
Brake check .............................. 8-21
Parking brake check.................. 5-14
Parking brake operation............ 5-14
Parking on hills......................... 5-14
Parking/parking on hills ................. 5-38
Personal lights ............................... 2-44
Phone, Car phone or CB radio ........ 4-35
Power
Front seat adjustment ................. 1-2
Power door lock .......................... 3-4
Power outlet.............................. 2-33
Power steering fluid .................. 8-14
Power steering system .............. 5-39
Power windows ......................... 2-38
Precautions
Audio operation ........................ 4-19
Child restraints ......................... 1-15
Cruise control............................ 5-14
Maintenance ............................... 8-5
Seat belt usage........................... 1-6
Supplemental restraint
system ...................................... 1-33
When starting and driving........... 5-2
Preview function (for Intelligent cruise
control system)............................... 5-37
Preview function (ICC system) ........ 5-31
Push starting.................................. 6-12
R
Radio.............................................. 4-18
Audio rear control switch .......... 4-34
Car phone or CB radio .............. 4-35
FM-AM radio with cassette player
and Compact Disc (CD)
changer..................................... 4-22
Steering wheel audio controls... 4-33
Rain-sensing auto wiper system ..... 2-21
Readiness for inspection/maintenance
(I/M) test (US only) ........................ 9-23
Rear audio control switch............... 4-34
Rear control button, Air
conditioner ..................................... 4-17
Rear door lock, Child safety rear door
lock .................................................. 3-6
10-5
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Rear power point............................ 2-33
Rear seat adjustment ....................... 1-4
Rear sun shade .............................. 2-42
Rear sun shade cleaning .................. 7-5
Rear view monitor .......................... 4-10
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch ............................. 2-22
Registering your vehicle in another
country........................................... 9-10
Remote keyless entry system ........... 3-6
Reporting safety defects
(US only) ........................................ 9-23
Roadside assistance program........... 6-2
Rollover ............................................ 5-5
Run-flat tires .................................... 6-3
S
Safety
Child seat belts........................... 1-9
Reporting safety defects (US
only) ......................................... 9-23
Towing safety............................ 9-18
Satellite radio operation................. 4-28
Seat
Automatic reverse operation ....... 1-5
Belt warning light ....................... 1-6
Belt warning light and chime .... 2-13
Entry/exit assist .......................... 1-4
Seat adjustment
Front power seat adjustment....... 1-2
Rear seat adjustment .................. 1-4
Seat belt(s)
Child safety................................. 1-9
Injured persons ........................ 1-10
Larger children.......................... 1-10
Precautions on seat belt usage ... 1-6
Pregnant women ....................... 1-10
Pre-crash seat belts .................. 1-10
Pre-tensioner seat belt .............. 1-43
Seat belt cleaning ....................... 7-5
Seat belt extenders................... 1-14
Seat belt maintenance .............. 1-14
Seat belts ................................... 1-6
Shoulder belt height
adjustment................................ 1-14
Three-point type........................ 1-11
Seat(s)
Climate controlled seats............ 2-30
Driver-side memory ................... 3-20
Heated seats............................. 2-28
Seats .......................................... 1-2
Security system, Vehicle security
system ........................................... 2-17
Security systems (Infiniti Vehicle
Immobilizer System), Engine
start ............................................... 2-18
Security systems (See vehicle security
system) .......................................... 2-17
Servicing air conditioner
(See automatic climate control) ...... 4-13
Servicing climate control ................ 4-18
Shift lock release ........................... 5-13
Shift lock release, CVT ................... 5-13
Shifting
Automatic transmission ....... 5-6, 5-9
Shoulder belt height adjustment .... 1-14
Side air bag system (See supplemental
side air bag and curtain side-impact air
bag system) ................................... 1-41
Spark plugs.................................... 8-18
Speedometer .................................... 2-4
Starting
Before starting the engine........... 5-8
Jump starting .............................. 6-9
Precautions when starting and
driving ........................................ 5-2
Push starting ............................ 6-12
Starting the engine ..................... 5-9
Steering
Power steering fluid .................. 8-14
Power steering system .............. 5-39
Steering wheel switch for audio
controls..................................... 4-33
Tilting telescopic steering
column...................................... 3-16
Storage .......................................... 2-34
Sun shade...................................... 2-41
Rear sun shade ......................... 2-42
Rear sun shade cleaning............. 7-5
Sun visors ...................................... 3-17
Sunglasses holder.......................... 2-35
Sunroof .......................................... 2-40
10-6
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
Supplemental air bag warning
labels ............................................. 1-44
Supplemental air bag warning
light ...................................... 1-44, 2-14
Supplemental front air bag
system ........................................... 1-40
Supplemental restraint system ....... 1-33
Precautions on supplemental
restraint system ........................ 1-33
Supplemental side and curtain
side-impact air bag system ............ 1-41
Switch
Audio control steering wheel
switch ....................................... 4-33
Audio rear control switch .......... 4-34
Fog light switch......................... 2-27
Hazard warning flasher
switch ....................................... 2-27
Headlight switch ....................... 2-23
Ignition switch............................ 5-6
Ignition switch automatic
transmission models............ 5-6, 5-9
Power door lock switch ............... 3-5
Rear window and outside mirror
defroster switch ........................ 2-22
Turn signal switch..................... 2-26
T
Tachometer ...................................... 2-5
Temperature gauge, Engine coolant
temperature gauge ........................... 2-5
Theft (Infiniti Vehicle Immobilizer
System), Engine start ..................... 2-18
Three-way catalyst............................ 5-3
Tilting telescopic steering
column ........................................... 3-16
Tire
Flat tire ....................................... 6-2
Low tire pressure warning
system ........................................ 5-3
Pressure, Low tire pressure warning
light .......................................... 2-12
Run-flat tires ............................... 6-3
Tire and loading information
label ................................ 8-33, 9-12
Tire pressure information
(display).................................... 4-39
Uniform tire quality grading ...... 9-22
Tires
Tire chains ................................ 8-37
Tire pressure............................. 8-31
Tire rotation .............................. 8-38
Types of tires ............................ 8-35
Wheel/tire size............................ 9-9
Wheels and tires ....................... 8-31
Top tether strap child restraints ..... 1-24
Towing
Flat towing ................................ 9-21
Tow truck towing....................... 6-13
Towing a trailer ......................... 9-16
Towing load/specification
chart ......................................... 9-16
Towing safety............................ 9-18
Trailer towing ................................. 9-16
Transceiver, HomeLink Universal
Transceiver ..................................... 2-46
Transmission
Automatic transmission fluid
(ATF).......................................... 8-14
Driving with automatic
transmission ........................ 5-6, 5-9
Transmission selector lever lock
release...................................... 5-13
Transmitter (See remote keyless entry
system) ............................................ 3-6
Traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country .............................. 9-10
Trip computer information
(display) ......................................... 4-37
Trunk
Auto open & close .................... 3-11
Cancelling the power ................ 3-11
Emergency trunk lid release ...... 3-14
Lid lock opener lever................. 3-10
Light ......................................... 2-46
Turn signal switch .......................... 2-26
U
Underbody cleaning.......................... 7-3
Uniform tire quality grading ........... 9-22
10-7
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
V
Vanity mirror lights ........................ 2-45
Vehicle
Dimensions and weights ............. 9-9
Identification number (VIN)....... 9-10
Loading information .................. 9-14
Recovery (freeing a stuck
vehicle) ..................................... 6-15
Security system......................... 2-17
Vehicle electronic systems .......... 4-7
Vehicle information (display)..... 4-36
Vehicle dynamic control off
switch ............................................ 2-32
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)
system ........................................... 5-44
Ventilators...................................... 4-12
Voice command (See voice-activated
control system)............................... 4-43
Voice-activated control system
(VACS) ............................................ 4-41
W
Warning labels, Air bag warning
labels ............................................. 1-44
Warning display ............................. 4-10
Warning light
Air bag warning light ....... 1-44, 2-14
Anti-lock brake system(ABS) warning
light .......................................... 2-10
Brake warning light................... 2-11
Door open warning light............ 2-11
Low fuel warning light............... 2-12
Low tire pressure warning
light .......................................... 2-12
Preview function warning light .. 2-13
Seat belt warning light and
chime........................................ 2-13
Warning lights ................................ 2-10
Warning, Hazard warning flasher
switch ............................................ 2-27
Warning, Low tire pressure warning
system ............................................. 5-3
Warning, Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders .......................... 2-10
Warranty, Emission control system
warranty ......................................... 9-23
Washer switch, Windshield wiper and
washer switch ................................ 2-20
Washing ........................................... 7-2
Waxing ............................................. 7-2
Weights (See dimensions and
weights) ........................................... 9-9
Wheel/tire size ................................. 9-9
Wheels and tires ............................ 8-31
Cleaning aluminum alloy
wheels ........................................ 7-3
Window washer fluid ...................... 8-15
Window(s)
Cleaning...................................... 7-3
Power windows ......................... 2-38
Windshield wiper and washer
switch ............................................ 2-20
Wiper
Windshield wiper and washer
switch ....................................... 2-20
Wiper blades............................. 8-19
X
Xenon headlights ........................... 2-22
10-8
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an
octane rating of at least 91 AKI (AntiKnock Index) number (Research octane
number 96).
If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of 87 AKI number (Research octane
number 91) may be temporarily used, but
only under the following precautions:
O Have the fuel tank filled only partially
with unleaded regular gasoline, and
fill up with unleaded premium gasoline as soon as possible.
O Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration
CAUTION
Under no circumstances should a leaded
gasoline be used, because this will damage
the three-way catalyst.
Using a fuel other than that specified could
adversely affect the emission control
system, and may also affect the warranty
coverage.
For additional information, see “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in
the “9. Technical and consumer information” section.
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
O API Certification Mark
O API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving
O ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III
O SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred
for all ambient temperatures.
See “Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer information” section for engine oil
and oil filter recommendation.
COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
See Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the inside of the driver side
center pillar.
NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the recommendations
outlined in the “Break-in schedule” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section. Follow
these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X
1. Engine oil (P.8-11)
2. Engine coolant (P.8-9)
3. Brake fluid (P.8-15)
4. Meter and gauges (P.2-3)
5. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-33)
6. Hood release (P.3-9)
7. Trunk lid release (P.3-10)
Fuel filler lid release (P.3-15)
8. Seat belt (P.1-6)
9. Door lock (P.3-4)
10.Supplemental side air bag (P.1-33)
Supplemental curtain side-impact air
bag (P.1-33)
11.Windshield washer fluid (P.8-15)
12.Battery (P.8-16)
13.Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P.1-33)
14.Air conditioner (P.4-13)
Audio system (P.4-18)
15.Fuel filter lid release (P.3-15)
Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)
16.Spare tire (P.6-8)
STI0399
Z 04.4.16/F50-D X

PDF Document reader online

This website is focused on providing document in readable format, online without need to install any type of software on your computer. If you are using thin client, or are not allowed to install document reader of particular type, this application may come in hand for you. Simply upload your document, and Docureader.top will transform it into readable format in a few seconds. Why choose Docureader.top?

  1. Unlimited sharing - you can upload document of any size. If we are able to convert it into readable format, you have it here - saved for later or immediate reading
  2. Cross-platform - no compromised when reading your document. We support most of modern browers without the need of installing any of external plugins. If your device can oper a browser - then you can read any document on it
  3. Simple uploading - no need to register. Just enter your email, title of document and select the file, we do the rest. Once the document is ready for you, you will receive automatic email from us.

Previous 10

Next 10